Lincoln 2015 Mkz Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Lincoln Lincoln-2015-Lincoln-Mkz-Owners-Manual-817586 lincoln-2015-lincoln-mkz-owners-manual-817586 lincoln pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 524

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

lincolncanada.com

201 5 MKZ

FH6J 19A321 AB

lincolnowner.com

O w n e r ’s M a n u a l

October 2014
Second Printing
Owner’s Manual
MKZ
Litho in U.S.A.

2 01 5 M K Z

O w n e r ’s M a n u a l

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20141006230718

Table of Contents
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate........................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services.........................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........13
Export Unique Options...................................14

Child Safety
General Information........................................15
Installing Child Seats.......................................17
Booster Seats..................................................26
Child Seat Positioning...................................28
Child Safety Locks..........................................30

Safety Belts
Principle of Operation...................................32
Fastening the Safety Belts...........................33

Safety Belt Height Adjustment....................37
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................37
Safety Belt Minder..........................................38
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance................................................40

Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..............................42

Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation....................................43
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................44
Front Passenger Sensing System..............45
Side Airbags.....................................................48
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags.........49
Side Curtain Airbags......................................49
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator...........51
Airbag Disposal...............................................52

Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................53
1

MKZ (), enUSA

Remote Control...............................................54
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control..........................................................58

MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................59
Creating a MyKey...........................................60
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................60
Checking MyKey System Status.................62
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................63
MyKey Troubleshooting................................63

Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................65
Keyless Entry....................................................70
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release..........................................................73

Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................75
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................76

Table of Contents
Steering Wheel

Windows and Mirrors

Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................78
Audio Control...................................................79
Voice Control...................................................80
Cruise Control.................................................80
Information Display Control.........................80
Heated Steering Wheel..................................81

Power Windows..............................................93
Global Opening and Closing.......................94
Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Interior Mirror...................................................96
Sun Visors.........................................................97
Sun Shades......................................................97
Moonroof..........................................................98

Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................82
Autowipers.......................................................83
Windshield Washers.......................................84

Instrument Cluster
Gauges............................................................100
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................102
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............106

Lighting
Lighting Control..............................................85
Autolamps.........................................................85
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................86
Headlamp Exit Delay......................................87
Daytime Running Lamps...............................87
Automatic High Beam Control....................88
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................89
Direction Indicators........................................90
Interior Lamps..................................................90

Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position.....................137
Head Restraints..............................................137
Power Seats....................................................139
Memory Function..........................................142
Rear Seats.......................................................143
Heated Seats..................................................144
Climate Controlled Seats............................146
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................147

Universal Garage Door Opener

Information Displays

Universal Garage Door Opener................148

General Information......................................107
Information Messages...................................113

Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................153

Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control..........................132
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................134
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................135

MKZ (), enUSA

Cabin Air Filter...............................................135
Remote Start...................................................136

Storage Compartments
Center Console.............................................155
Overhead Console.......................................155

Table of Contents
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information......................................156
Keyless Starting.............................................156
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................157
Engine Block Heater....................................160

Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.........................................161
Fuel Quality.....................................................162
Running Out of Fuel.....................................163
Refueling.........................................................165
Fuel Consumption.........................................167
Emission Control System............................168

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................183
Electric Parking Brake..................................184
Hill Start Assist...............................................186

Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................188
Using Traction Control.................................188

Principle of Operation..................................190
Using Stability Control..................................191

Parking Aids

Automatic Transmission................................171

All-Wheel Drive

Cruise Control

Using All-Wheel Drive...................................177

Brakes

Principle of Operation.................................203
Using Cruise Control...................................203
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................204

General Information......................................183
3

MKZ (), enUSA

Driver Alert.......................................................211
Lane Keeping System..................................212
Blind Spot Information System..................217
Steering..........................................................222
Collision Warning System..........................223
Drive Control.................................................226

Load Carrying

Stability Control

Parking Aid......................................................192
Active Park Assist..........................................195
Rear View Camera........................................199

Transmission

Driving Aids

Load Limit.......................................................228

Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................237
Recommended Towing Weights..............238
Essential Towing Checks...........................240
Transporting the Vehicle............................242
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........243

Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................245
Economical Driving......................................245
Driving Through Water...............................245
Floor Mats......................................................246

Table of Contents
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................248
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................249
Fuel Shutoff...................................................249
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................250
Post-Crash Alert System............................252

Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................254
In California (U.S. Only)...............................255
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................256
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)...........................................257
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................257
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................259
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......259
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................260

Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart.............................261

Changing a Fuse..........................................278

Maintenance
General Information.....................................279
Opening and Closing the Hood...............279
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................281
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L.....................283
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™......285
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L...........................285
Engine Oil Check.........................................285
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................286
Engine Coolant Check................................286
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......289
Brake Fluid Check........................................293
Power Steering Fluid Check......................293
Washer Fluid Check....................................293
Fuel Filter........................................................294
Changing the 12V Battery..........................294
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................296
Changing the Wiper Blades......................296
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................297
Changing a Bulb...........................................298

MKZ (), enUSA

Bulb Specification Chart.............................298
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................301

Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................303
Cleaning Products........................................303
Cleaning the Exterior..................................303
Waxing............................................................304
Cleaning the Engine....................................305
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.........................................................305
Cleaning the Interior...................................305
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................308
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................309
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................309
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................309
Vehicle Storage.............................................310

Wheels and Tires
Temporary Mobility Kit.................................313
Tire Care.........................................................326
Using Snow Chains......................................340

Table of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............341
Changing a Road Wheel.............................345
Technical Specifications.............................353

Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications..................................355
Motorcraft Parts............................................356
Vehicle Identification Number..................358
Vehicle Certification Label.........................358
Transmission Code Designation..............359
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................360
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.......366

Audio System
General Information.....................................372
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................373
Media Hub......................................................375

MyLincoln Touch™

Entertainment................................................402
Phone..............................................................424
Information......................................................431
Climate............................................................442
Navigation......................................................446

Accessories
Accessories...................................................456

Appendices
End User License Agreement...................458

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................484

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........487
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............491
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................495
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............499

General Information.....................................376
Settings...........................................................389

MKZ (), enUSA

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.

Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.

MKZ (), enUSA

Introduction
Safety alert

Cabin air filter

Engine coolant temperature

See Owner's Manual

Check fuel cap

Engine oil

Air conditioning system

Child safety door lock or unlock

Explosive gas

Anti-lock braking system

Child seat lower anchor

Fan warning

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Child seat tether anchor

Fasten safety belt

Battery

Cruise control

Front airbag

Battery acid

Do not open when hot

Front fog lamps

Brake fluid - non petroleum based

Engine air filter

Fuel pump reset

Brake system

Engine coolant

Fuse compartment

E162384

E71340

MKZ (), enUSA

Introduction
Hazard warning flashers

Note operating instructions

Heated rear window

Panic alarm

Shield the eyes
E167012

Stability control
E138639

Heated windshield

Windshield wash and wipe

Parking aid
E139213

Interior luggage compartment
release

Parking brake

Jack

Power steering fluid

Keep out of reach of children

Power windows front/rear

Lighting control

Power window lockout

Low tire pressure warning

Service engine soon

Maintain correct fluid level

Side airbag

DATA RECORDING

E161353

MKZ (), enUSA

Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle
diagnostic information received through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.

Introduction
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford
of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for
vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only
(if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used for any purpose. See
MyLincoln Touch™ (page 376).

Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.

Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.

To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or

MKZ (), enUSA

Introduction
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.

Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature. See
MyLincoln Touch™ (page 376).

MKZ (), enUSA

Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 376).

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

Introduction
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal. For more information visit:

Phone: 1-888-498-8801
For more information regarding Lincoln
Automotive Financial Services, as well as
access Account Manager, please go to
www.LincolnAFS.com.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate

LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. If you have
financed or leased your vehicle through
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services, thank
you for your business.

Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

For your convenience we offer a number of
ways to contact us, as well as help manage
your account.

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.

Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A great
way to know for sure you are getting this
level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.

Introduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Ford Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Ford Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNINGS
Failure to follow the specific warnings
and instructions could result in
personal injury. See Supplementary
Restraints System (page 43).
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger airbag.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when

MKZ (), enUSA

using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.

Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.

MKZ (), enUSA

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.

WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age and
weight thresholds from National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed in
your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check
with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
transportation, locate your local St. John
Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport
Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child

Child size, height, weight, or age

Recommended restraint type

Infants or toddlers

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).

Small children

Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).

Use a belt-positioning booster seat.

Larger children

Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt- Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).

MKZ (), enUSA

Child Safety
•

•

You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 45).

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts

Child Seats

WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.

E142594

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).

MKZ (), enUSA

Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.

Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.

Standard safety belts

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.

E142529

MKZ (), enUSA

2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.

Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142531

E142875

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.

MKZ (), enUSA

E142533

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of

Child Safety
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will provide extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).

10.

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.

Inflatable safety belts

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.

E142534

E146522

MKZ (), enUSA

Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.

E146523

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

E146524

Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.

MKZ (), enUSA

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull upward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.

Child Safety
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146525

E142534

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).

MKZ (), enUSA

10.

Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to
attach the child seat, however the safety belt
can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion
and seat back below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety seats
with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.

E142535

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.

MKZ (), enUSA

E144054

Child Safety
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child seat manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those in this
vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments on
belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child seat is attached to that anchor.

Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to your vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety
belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if included with the child seat.

Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the safety belt, the lower
anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you
can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):

MKZ (), enUSA

Using Tether Straps

Child Safety
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also be
removed.
E142537

Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.

E144274

2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position, then open the
tether anchor cover.

MKZ (), enUSA

E144275

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.

Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
collision.

pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:

•
•
•

Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?

Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100

E142595

•

Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?

MKZ (), enUSA

E68924

•

Backless booster seats

Child Safety
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.

If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710

•

High back booster seats

E142596

MKZ (), enUSA

Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.

Child Safety

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.

Child Safety
WARNINGS
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.

WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.

Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.

To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.

Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Restraint Type

Combined weight of
child and child seat

Rear facing child
seat

Up to 65 lb (29 kg)

Rear facing child
seat

Over 65 lb (29 kg)

Forward facing
child seat

Up to 65 lb (29 kg)

Forward facing
child seat

Over 65 lb (29 kg)

Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)

Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 137).

LATCH (lower
anchors only)

Safety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)

Safety belt only

X
X

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.

MKZ (), enUSA

Safety belt and top
tether anchor

Child Safety
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.

Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.

MKZ (), enUSA

Safety Belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your seat
back upright and the lap belt snug and
low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.

WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts.
• shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt).

Safety Belts
•
•
•

•

height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.

FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.

E142588

Safety belt warning light and chime.

2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
•

Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.

The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners may
also activate when a side curtain airbag is
deployed.

WARNING
E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you
securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.

MKZ (), enUSA

Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the safety belt should be positioned across
the chest. Pregnant women should also
follow this practice. See the following figure.

Safety Belts

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.

Safety Belt Locking Modes

Vehicle Sensitive Mode

WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety belt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.

This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination safety belts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.

Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard passenger
and rear seat safety belts have both the
vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.

MKZ (), enUSA

In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.

Safety Belts
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
15).

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the safety
belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts
(second row only–if equipped)

How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
E146363

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull
upward until the entire belt is pulled out.

MKZ (), enUSA

The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted in
the shoulder portion of the safety belts of
the second-row outboard seating positions.

Safety Belts
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
compatible with most infant and child safety
car seats and belt positioning booster seats
when properly installed. This is because they
are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a
lower pressure and at a slower rate than
traditional airbags. After inflation, the
shoulder portion of the safety belt remains
cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag located in the shoulder
safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
• Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.

The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body than
regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control head
and neck motion for passengers.
WARNING
E146364

During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.

How does the rear inflatable safety belt
system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will function
like standard restraints in everyday usage.

The rear inflatable safety belts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes
and some side impact crashes. The fact that
the rear inflatable safety belt did not inflate
in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.

Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.

E146365

MKZ (), enUSA

If the rear inflatable safety belt has
deployed, it will not function again. The
rear inflatable safety belt system must be
replaced by an authorized dealer.

Safety Belts
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing or
on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use
the safety belt extension only if the safety
belt is too short for you when fully extended.

SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjusters
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.

E146191

MKZ (), enUSA

To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked
in place.

SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.

Safety Belts
Conditions of operation
If...

Then...

The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...

The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.

SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.

The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
you place in the front passenger seat, only
the front seat passengers receive warnings
as determined by the front passenger
sensing system.

MKZ (), enUSA

If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.

Safety Belts

If...

Then...

You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.

You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminyour vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
after you switch the ignition on...
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
buckle your safety belts.

MKZ (), enUSA

Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).

•
•

The ignition is off.
The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.

1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.

MKZ (), enUSA

CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY
BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), rear inflatable safety belts (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a collision. Read
the child restraint manufacturer's instructions
for additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.

Safety Belts
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced. However,
if the collision was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 303).

MKZ (), enUSA

Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.

•

The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.

The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.

•

Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.

How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?

MKZ (), enUSA

Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.

The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.

Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To reduce the risk
of injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.

MKZ (), enUSA

The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.

Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.

E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).

MKZ (), enUSA

Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest
and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.

the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.

Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seat back, with your feet on the floor.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
E142846

MKZ (), enUSA

Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.

Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger sensing
system which could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.

The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.

•

Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.

•

The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
•

E151849

The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).

MKZ (), enUSA

When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.

When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
ON lamp and remain illuminated.

Supplementary Restraints System
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person isn’t
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat back in the full upright
position.

•

Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.

•

Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.

Occupant

Passenger airbag status indicator

Passenger airbag

Empty

OFF: Lit

Disabled

ON: Unlit
Child

OFF: Lit

Disabled

ON: Unlit
Adult

OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit

Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.

MKZ (), enUSA

Enabled

Supplementary Restraints System
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter
due to the conditions described in the list
above.
To know if the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly, See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 51).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 254).

SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.

Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
E152533

The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE
AIRBAGS
Driver and passenger knee airbags are
located under or within the instrument panel.
During a crash, the restraints control module
may activate the driver and passenger knee
airbags (individually or both) based on crash
severity and respective occupant conditions.
Under certain crash and occupant conditions,
the driver and passenger knee airbags may
deploy (individually or both) but the
corresponding front airbag may not activate.
As with front and side airbags, it is important
to be properly seated and restrained to
reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

MKZ (), enUSA

Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 51).

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying side curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side curtain airbag could injure you as
it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the side curtain airbags, its
fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing side curtain
airbags. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
All occupants of the vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and side
curtain airbag is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the side curtain airbag.
If the side curtain airbags have
deployed, the side curtain airbags will
not function again. The side curtain airbags
(including the A, B and C pillar trim and
headliner) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the side curtain
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of injury in a crash.

The side curtain airbags will deploy during
significant side crashes. The side curtain
airbags are mounted to the roof side-rail
sheet metal, behind the headliner, above
each row of seats. In certain sideways
crashes, the side curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle will be activated.
The side curtain airbags are designed to
inflate between the side window area and
occupants to further enhance protection
provided in side impact crashes.
The system consists of the following:

•

Side curtain airbags located above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow side air curtain
deployment.

Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the back
seats. The side curtain airbags will not
interfere with children restrained using a
properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward
from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.

E75004

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the side
curtain airbags included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side curtain airbags.

CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.

Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat
mounted side airbags, side curtain airbags
and optional rear inflatable safety belts.
Based on the type of crash (frontal impact or
side impact), the restraints control module
will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.

MKZ (), enUSA

•
•

The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.

If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to deploy
a safety device.

Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and
optional rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The design of the side airbags and side
curtain airbags is to inflate in certain side
impact crashes. Side airbags and side
curtain airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.

MKZ (), enUSA

Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.

Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of the front exterior
door handle.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 54).

Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key

E151796

E144506

Your intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.

Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access the
key blade.
If the central locking function fails to operate,
you can lock the doors individually using the
key blade in the position shown.

Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to lock or unlock the driver door.

MKZ (), enUSA

E112203

On the driver's side, turn the key clockwise
to lock, and on the passenger side turn the
key counterclockwise to lock.

Keys and Remote Controls
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.

E153890

2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.

Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.

E151796

1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.

Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.

E153891

A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery is
low. See Information Messages (page 113).

3. Remove the batteries.

MKZ (), enUSA

Keys and Remote Controls
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.

Car Finder
Press the button twice within three
seconds. The horn sounds and
E138623
direction indicators will flash. We
recommend that you use this method to
locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.

Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to deactivate.

Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.

E138625

The remote start button is on the
transmitter.

This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has
an extended operating range.
You can configure automatic climate control
to operate when the vehicle is remote
started. See Climate Control (page 132).
Manual climate control systems will run at
the setting set when you switched off the
vehicle.
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.

MKZ (), enUSA

The remote start system will not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The alarm system is triggered.
• You disable the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in P.
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
• The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides status
feedback of remote start or stop commands.

Keys and Remote Controls

LED

Status

Solid green

Remote start or
extension successful

Solid red

Remote stop
successful; engine
off

Blinking red

Remote start or stop
failed

Blinking green

Waiting for status
update

Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.

Note: If the vehicle has been remote started
with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you
must switch the ignition on before driving
your vehicle. With an intelligent access
transmitter, you must press the START/STOP
button on the instrument panel once while
applying the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle.

E138626

The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start will run
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. It can be switched on or off in the
information display. See (page 107).

MKZ (), enUSA

The power windows will not work during the
remote start and the radio will not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If you programmed the
duration to last 10 minutes, the second 10
minutes will begin after what is left of the first
activation time. For example, if the vehicle
had been running from the first remote start
for five minutes, the vehicle will continue to
run now for a total of 15 minutes. You can
extend the remote start up to a maximum of
35 minutes.

Keys and Remote Controls
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting

E138625

Press the button once. The parking
lamps will turn off.

You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the running
vehicle.

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 75).
To re-program the passive anti-theft system
see an authorized dealer.

You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display. See
(page 107).
Memory Feature
You can recall the memory seat position,
mirror position, and steering column position
(if equipped) with your intelligent access
keyfob you link it to a pre-set position. See
Memory Function (page 142).

MKZ (), enUSA

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
•
•
•

Create a MyKey.
Program configurable MyKey settings.
Clear all MyKey features.

When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using
the information display to determine:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.
Note: Switch the vehicle on to use the
system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.

Note: For vehicles equipped with
push-button start, when both a MyKey and
an admin remote transmitter are present,
the admin remote transmitter will be
recognized by the vehicle while switching
the vehicle on to start the vehicle.

Configurable Settings

Non-configurable Settings

•

The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Safety belt reminder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will mute
when the front seat passengers’ safety
belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuel or
low charge warning activates earlier,
giving the MyKey user more time to refuel
or recharge.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid and
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with
cross traffic alert.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if equipped on your vehicle.

MKZ (), enUSA

With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key.
A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.

MyKey™
•

•

Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to switch off Advance
Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assist, or the do not disturb
feature (if your vehicle is equipped with
these features).

CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:

1. Insert the key you want to program into the
ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with a
push-button start, place the intelligent access
key fob into the backup slot. The location of
your backup slot is in another chapter. See
Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 156).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls, and select Settings then
MyKey by pressing OK or the > button.
4. Press OK or the > button to select Create
MyKey.
5. When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings.

MKZ (), enUSA

Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls, and select Settings,
then MyKey by pressing OK or > button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 107).

MyKey™
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or

fob.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Clear MyKey

Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.

All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.

MKZ (), enUSA

MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS

You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 107).

To find information on a programed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist.

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates the number of MyKeys programed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} Admin Keys

Indicates how many admin keys are programed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has
been programed.

MKZ (), enUSA

MyKey™
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition

I cannot create a MyKey.

Potential Causes

•
•

•

The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup slot, located
in the center console. See General Information (page 156).
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.

I cannot program the configurable
settings.

•
•

The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).

I cannot clear the MyKeys.

•
•

The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).

I lost the only admin key.

Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.

•

MKZ (), enUSA

MyKey™
Condition

Potential Causes

I lost a key.

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75).

MyKey distances do not accumulate.

•
•
•

The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.

No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.

•
•

An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).

MKZ (), enUSA

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Door Lock Indicator

Remote Control

You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.

An LED on each door window trim will light
when you lock the door. It will remain lit for
up to 10 minutes after you switch off the
ignition.

You can use the remote control at any time.
The luggage compartment release button
only works when your vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Power Door Locks

Switch Inhibitor

Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)

The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.

E138628

When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch and interior trunk
release switch will no longer operate after
20 seconds. You must unlock your vehicle
with the remote control or keyless keypad,
or switch the ignition on, to restore function
to these switches. You can switch this feature
on or off in the information display. See
(page 107).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening

Unlock

Lock

Pull the interior door release handle twice to
unlock and open the rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull will
unlatch the door.

MKZ (), enUSA

E138629

Press the button to unlock the
driver door.

Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signals
will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The turn signals will
flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. Driver door unlock mode
will only unlock the driver door when the
unlock button is pressed once. All door

Locks
unlock mode unlocks all doors with one
press of the unlock button. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control, keyless
entry keypad and intelligent access. You can
also change the mode in the information
display. See (page 107).
Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.

Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors
and the luggage compartment are closed.
Mislock

Opening the Luggage Compartment

E138630

Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage compartment.

Make sure to close and latch the luggage
compartment before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched luggage compartment may cause
objects to fall out or block your view.

Activating Intelligent Access
You must have the intelligent access key
within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. Make sure not to touch the
lock sensor on top of the handle.

If any door or the luggage compartment is
open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with
an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the lamps will not flash.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See (page 107).

MKZ (), enUSA

E146044

Touch the top of the door handle to lock your
vehicle. There will be a brief delay before
you can unlock your vehicle again.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
to avoid issues with operation.

Locks
At the Luggage Compartment

E164806

Press the exterior release button hidden
above the license plate.

Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent access
key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.

When you electronically lock your vehicle
(with any door open, vehicle in park and
ignition off), your vehicle will search for an
intelligent access key in the passenger
compartment after you close the last door.
If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors
will immediately unlock and the horn will
sound twice, indicating that a key is inside.

Auto Relock

You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your
vehicle after you have closed all the doors
by:
• using the keyless entry keypad
• pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key
• touching the locking area on the handle
with another intelligent access key in
your hand.

Autolock Feature

When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• the ignition is on, or
• the ignition is off and your vehicle is not
in P.

MKZ (), enUSA

If you press the unlock button on the remote
control and do not open a door within 45
seconds, your vehicle will lock and the alarm
will arm. You can enable or disable this
feature in the information display. See (page
107).

The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion, and
• your vehicle attains a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• you open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• your vehicle then attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Locks
Autounlock Feature

Illuminated Entry

Battery Saver

The autounlock feature will unlock all the
doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are closed,
and your vehicle has been in motion at
a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory;
and
• you open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.

The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will illuminate when you unlock the doors
with the remote entry system.

If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome lamps
or headlamps on, the battery saver will shut
them off 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off.

Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.

•

Enabling or Disabling
Note: You can enable or disable the
autolock and autounlock features
independently of each other.
You can enable or disable these features in
the information display or your authorized
dealer can do it for you. See (page 107).

The illuminated entry system will turn off the
lights if:
• the ignition is on,
• you press the remote control lock button,
or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:

•

you turn them on with the lamp control,
or
any door is open.

If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition
state, it will shut off once it detects a certain
amount of battery drain or after 45 minutes.

Luggage Compartment
From Inside Your Vehicle
Press the button on the
instrument panel to unlatch the
trunk.

Illuminated Exit

E138633

The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will illuminate when all doors are closed and
you switch the ignition off.

With the Remote Control

The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse
• you press the START/STOP button.

MKZ (), enUSA

Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys

E138630

Press twice within three seconds
to unlatch the trunk.

Locks
From Outside Your Vehicle

E164806

Press the release button above the license
plate to unlatch the trunk. Your vehicle must
be unlocked or have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk.

Power Decklid (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power decklid area before using the
power decklid control.

WARNINGS
Keep keys out of the reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate the
power decklid, or to play near to an open or
moving power decklid.

If the decklid reverses or starts to close after
an open request, you will hear a fast
continuous chime. This indicates excessive
load on the decklid or a possible torsion bar
failure. See your authorized dealer if you still
have a fast chime after you remove the load.

Note: Do not drive with the decklid open
unless you disable the power feature. Make
sure you secure the decklid to you vehicle.

From Inside Your Vehicle

You can enable or disable the power decklid
using the information display. The remote
control and instrument panel button will still
operate the decklid regardless of the setting.

E138633

Opening and Closing the Power Decklid
Note: You can reverse the decklid
movement. Press the instrument panel or
decklid button again, or press the remote
control button twice.
The decklid will only operate with your
vehicle in P.

MKZ (), enUSA

Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
Press twice within three seconds.
E138630

Locks
From Outside Your Vehicle

Obstacle Detection
The decklid will reverse to full open if it
detects an obstacle while closing. Three
chimes will sound as the decklid begins to
reopen. Remove the obstacle to close the
decklid.
Note: Before driving off, check the
instrument cluster for a trunk ajar or door
ajar message or warning indicator. Failure
to do this could result in unintentionally
leaving the decklid open while driving.

E164806

Press the control button located above the
license plate. Your vehicle must be unlocked
or have the intelligent access transmitter
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the decklid to open
it.

The decklid will stop and three chimes will
sound if it detects an obstacle while opening.
Remove the obstacle to operate the decklid.

Note: Let the power system operate the
decklid after pressing the control. Pushing
or pulling the decklid may activate the
obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation.

The decklid may not operate properly and
you may need to reset it if:
• the battery is dead or has low voltage
• you disconnect the battery
• you manually close the decklid and leave
it unlatched.

With the Decklid Close Button

E194407

Press the button inside the decklid
on the left side.

Resetting the Power Decklid

To reset the power decklid:

MKZ (), enUSA

1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds
then reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the decklid.
3. Power open the decklid using the remote
control or instrument panel button.

KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and then
it lights up so you can see and touch the
appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.

Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also create up to five of your
own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:

E138637

You can use the keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors
• recall memory seat and mirror positions
• program and erase personal entry codes
• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm
• release the trunk.
Note: The keypad will not operate a power
decklid.

1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
•
•

press 3·4 to save personal code 2
press 5·6 to save personal code 3

MKZ (), enUSA

•
•

press 7·8 to save personal code 4
press 9·0 to save personal code 5.

You may also program a personal entry code
through the MyLincoln Touch system. See
Settings (page 389).
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
•
•
•

Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
Entry code 3 will recall driver 3 memory
positions.

Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.

Locks
Erasing a Personal Code

Unlocking and Locking the Doors

Displaying the Factory Set Code

1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.

To Unlock the Driver Door

Note: You will need to have two
programmed intelligent access keys for this
procedure.

Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps will illuminate.

All personal codes are now erased and only
the factory-set 5–digit code will work.

Note: All doors will unlock if you enable the
all-door unlocking mode. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 65).

Anti-Scan Feature

To Unlock All Doors

The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.

Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.

The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote
control
• switching the ignition on
• unlocking your vehicle using intelligent
access.

To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
(with the driver door closed). You do not
need to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Trunk
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 within five seconds.

MKZ (), enUSA

To display the factory-set code in the
information display:

E155835

1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in the
cupholder. Place the first programmed
key in the backup slot (B) at the bottom
of the cupholder.
2. Press the START/STOP button once and
wait a few seconds.
3. Press the START/STOP button again and
remove the key.

Locks
4. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory-set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.

INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a child’s
reach. Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.

WARNINGS
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape for
children and adults if they become locked
inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with the
operation and location of the release handle.

E144403

MKZ (), enUSA

Locks
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail lamps.
It is composed of a material that will glow for
hours in darkness following brief exposure
to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from within
the luggage compartment.

MKZ (), enUSA

Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM

SecuriLock

Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.

The system helps prevent your vehicle from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting your
vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting your vehicle.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and
restart your vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.

If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
correctly coded key, it is not operating
properly. A message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after
switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms your vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.

MKZ (), enUSA

The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer. You need to erase the
key codes from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.

Security
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access keys readily accessible. See an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that
you close all the doors before beginning and
that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you perform any steps out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.

7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent access
key.

E155835

1. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the
cupholder. Place the first programmed
key in the backup slot (B) at the bottom
of the cupholder, then press the push
button ignition switch.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
76

MKZ (), enUSA

If programming was not successful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you
are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.

Security
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•

•
•

Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.

MKZ (), enUSA

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 137).
E157084

3. Lock the steering column.

2
2

Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)
WARNING

1
E157083

1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 137).

MKZ (), enUSA

E161834

Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• tilt: press the top or bottom of the control
• telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.

Steering Wheel
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control again
after encountering the new stopping
position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the column position.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to the full up position to
allow extra room to exit your vehicle. The
column will return to the previous setting
when you switch the ignition on. You can
enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 107).
E145979

AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
You can operate the following functions with
the control:

Volume up

Volume down

Seek up or next

Seek down or previous

Mute

Memory Feature

Seek, Next or Previous

You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 142).

Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset
• play the next or the previous track.

Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation. The
column responds to the adjustment control.

MKZ (), enUSA

Steering Wheel
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band
• seek through a track.

CRUISE CONTROL

See Cruise Control (page 203).

Type 1

INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL

VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)

E145981

See Information Displays (page 107).
E145976

Cluster Display Control Features

Type 2
E145980

Voice recognition

End a call

Answer a call

E145982

See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 376).
E145977

MKZ (), enUSA

Steering Wheel
Use this control to access some of the
MyLincoln Touch features in the information
display. Navigate through the screen and
press OK to select. See MyLincoln Touch™
(page 376).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 376).

MKZ (), enUSA

Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Intermittent Wipe

D
C

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.

A
C
E169313

Single wipe

E169314

Intermittent wipe

Shortest wipe interval

Normal wipe

Intermittent wipe

High speed wipe

Longest wipe interval

Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.

MKZ (), enUSA

Wipers and Washers
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.

In these conditions, you can do the following
to help keep your windshield clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.

Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically when
the rain sensor activates the windshield
wipers continuously.
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.

C
E169315

Highest sensitivity

Lowest sensitivity

MKZ (), enUSA

The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor.
You will find it in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount
of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It will
adjust the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is automatically
set to on and remains on until you switch it
off in the information display. You can also
switch the feature back on at any time. See
(page 107).
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor. Set the control to low
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. Set the control
to high sensitivity, and the wipers will turn
on when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.

Wipers and Washers
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the moisture
on the windshield only. Use the wiper lever
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.

E169316

To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer fluid.
This feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See (page 107).

MKZ (), enUSA

Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROL

High Beams

Headlamp Flasher

E162679

E162680

E142449

Off

Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.

Pull the lever toward you slightly and release
it to flash the headlamps.

Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps

Push the lever forward again or pull the lever
toward you to switch the high beams off.

AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)

Headlamps

WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime fog.
Always ensure that your headlamps are
switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during
all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a collision.

MKZ (), enUSA

Lighting
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 107).

Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.

Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

E142451

When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.

Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: If you disconnect and connect the
battery, or fully discharge and charge the
battery, the illuminated components will
switch to the maximum setting.

Lighting
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

E165337

Press repeatedly or press and hold
to dim.

Press repeatedly or press and hold
to brighten.

After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with any
door open or 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed. You can cancel this feature
by pulling the direction indicator toward you
again or switching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)

WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Make sure the
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.

Type 1 - Conventional (NonConfigurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
87

MKZ (), enUSA

Lighting
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.

When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.

Type 2 - Configurable

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)

Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 107).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
107).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.

The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the tail
lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers. The
low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control of
the high beams is not functioning properly,
check the windshield in front of the camera
for a blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera’s field-of-view repaired.

The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily override
autolamp control.
88

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system will go into low beam
mode until you clear the blockage. A
message may also appear in the instrument
cluster display noting the front camera is
blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system . However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
will notice a decrease in the availability of
the high beam system, especially at start up.
If you want to change the beam state
independently of the system, you may switch
the high beams on or off using the
multifunction switch. Automatic control will
resume when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to switch
the high beams off and on.

Lighting
Once the system is active, the high beams
will switch on if:
• the ambient light level is low enough
• there is no traffic in front of the vehicle
• the vehicle speed is greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h)
The high beams will switch off if:
• the system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the tail lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
• vehicle speed falls below 16 mph
(25 km/h)
• the ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required
• the system detects severe rain, snow or
fog
• the camera is blocked

When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or turn
the lighting control switch from autolamps to
headlamps.
E142451

Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position.

Manually Overriding the System

E169254

MKZ (), enUSA

The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps
B. With adaptive headlamps

Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 107). See Autolamps (page
85).

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS

Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS

E142451

E161714

Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system will operate when the
vehicle is driven.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When the vehicle is started, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.

The system will only work with the lighting
control switch in the autolamp position.

Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.

INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps switch on when:

MKZ (), enUSA

E162681

Lighting
•
•
•

Rear Interior Lamp

You open any door.
You press a remote control button.
You press switch A on the front interior
lamp.

Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each switch on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, sunroof, and
window shade features are on your vehicle.
Note: Press switch B to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp illuminates amber when the
door function is off. When the door function
is off and you open a door, the courtesy and
door lamps stay off. Press switch B again to
switch the door function back on. The
indicator lamp illuminates white when the
door function is on. When the door function
is on and you open a door, the courtesy and
door lamps switch on.

D
E167127

All lamps on switch.

Door function switch.

All lamps off switch.

Map lamp switches.

MKZ (), enUSA

D
E150100

The rear interior lamps are hidden in the
headliner. You can switch individual rear
interior lamps on independently by waving
your hand near the small white light in the
headliner.

Lighting
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)

E182517

Left-hand side map lamp.

Right-hand side map lamp.

You can switch the lamps on individually by
pressing the buttons.

MKZ (), enUSA

Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.

Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.

E146043

MKZ (), enUSA

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.

Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock

Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See (page 107).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.

Opening the Windows

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when you
lock the rear window controls.

You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows and vent the
moonroof. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or unlock
button to stop movement.

Accessory Delay

Closing the Windows

E195228

You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.

GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING

WARNING
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they are
free of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the window openings.

You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.

MKZ (), enUSA

To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.

Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning the mirror
to its original position.

Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

Note: Once you press the control, you
cannot stop the mirrors midway through their
movement. Wait until the mirrors stop moving
and press the control again.

Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
135).

Memory Mirrors

E144073

Left-hand mirror.

Adjustment control.

You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 142).

Right-hand mirror.

Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)

To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control illuminates.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.

The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns
on.

E176218

To fold both mirrors, make sure you switch
your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory
mode or the engine running) and then:
1. Press the control to fold the mirrors.
2. Press the control again to unfold.

MKZ (), enUSA

Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.

Windows and Mirrors
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)

The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions
from the main mirror and begins to appear
in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).

WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. Their design can
increase your visibility along the side of your
vehicle.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you intend to
change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to
verify traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.

See Blind Spot Information System (page
217).

INTERIOR MIRROR
A

WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.

E138665

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
96

MKZ (), enUSA

Windows and Mirrors
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

SUN VISORS

Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.

E162197
E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

SUN SHADES (If Equipped)
Note: Do not try to move the sun shade
manually.
The power rear sun shade covers the rear
window of the vehicle.

MKZ (), enUSA

Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

E145986

The control is in the overhead console.
The sun shade has a one-touch up and down
feature. Press and release the control to
move the sun shade. To stop motion, press
the control a second time.

The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation, press
the control a second time.

The sun shade automatically retracts when
you shift the transmission into R (Reverse).

E191272

Moonroof open. Press and release
to open the moonroof. The
moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position. Press and release
the control again to open the
moonroof fully.

Moonroof vent. Press and release
to vent the moonroof.

MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.

MKZ (), enUSA

Windows and Mirrors
C

Sunshade open. Press and release
to open the sunshade. The
sunshade opens automatically with
the moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
closed. Note: The sunshade stops
short of its fully opened position
for the comfort of rear passengers.
To open the sunshade fully, press
the control again.

Sunshade close. Press and release
to close the sunshade.

Moonroof close. Press and release
to close the moonroof from either
the open or vent positions.

Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses some
distance if an obstacle is detected while
closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.

MKZ (), enUSA

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES

E152749

Tachometer

Information display

100

MKZ (), enUSA

Instrument Cluster
C

Speedometer

Fuel gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display Registers the accumulated distance
your vehicle has traveled.

•

Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of
your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.

•

See (page 107).

The needle should move toward F when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E
after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle
needs service soon.

Vehicle Settings and Personalization

After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:

Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer

See (page 107).

101

MKZ (), enUSA

It may take a short time for the needle to
reach F after leaving the gas station. This
is normal and depends upon the slope
of pavement at the gas station.
The fuel amount dispensed into the tank
is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
If the gas station nozzle shuts off before
the tank is full, try a different gas pump
nozzle.

Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th.

Instrument Cluster
Variations:
Driving type (fuel economy conditions)

Fuel gauge position

Distance-to-empty

Highway driving

1/16th

35 miles to 80 miles (56 km to 129 km)

Severe duty driving (trailer towing, extended idle)

1/16th

35 miles (56km)

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.

WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.

102

MKZ (), enUSA

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 204).
E144524

On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned on.
Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.

Instrument Cluster
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp
is also illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.

Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 217). See
Information Messages (page 113).
E151262

Brake System
E144522

Direction Indicator

It will illuminate when you engage
the parking brake with the ignition
on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If the
parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.

Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.

WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may occur.
It will take you longer to stop your vehicle.
Have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
of personal injury.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.

103

MKZ (), enUSA

Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 298).

Electric Park Brake
It will illuminate or flash when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric Parking
Brake (page 184).
E146190

Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature

Front Airbag

Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 286).

If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer.

Engine Oil

Heads Up Display (If Equipped)

If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 285).

A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
E156133
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It will also illuminate momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.

Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.

Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. See Safety Belt
Minder (page 38).

Hood Ajar

High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.

104

MKZ (), enUSA

E159324

Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.

Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.

Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.

Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid

E132353

It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.

Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.

Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after the
engine is started, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 168).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have an authorized dealer service your
vehicle immediately.

105

MKZ (), enUSA

The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 168).

Stability Control
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
E138639
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 191).

Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Off

Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 191).

Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.

Trunk Ajar

Headlamps On Warning Chime

E159323

Displays when the ignition is on
and the trunk is not completely
closed.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door and
you have left the key in the ignition with it in
the off or accessory position.

Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.

Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.

106

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION

Information Display Controls

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.

•

Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:

E152750

•

•
•

Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.

•
•
•
•

Trip 1 & 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings

Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
Trip 1 & 2
Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed trip information.

107

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2

All value screen (Trip odometer, Average fuel economy, Trip Timer)
•
•
•

Trip odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.
Trip Timer— The timer stops when you switch off your vehicle and restarts when you restart your vehicle.

Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy

Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average MPG
Auto StartStop
•
•
•

Instantaneous Fuel Economy: This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
Average MPG — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.
Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what is happening with your system. See Information
Messages (page 113).

Press and hold OK to reset your current fuel economy information.

108

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Driver Assist

Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between different driver assist choices.
Driver Assist

Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Adaptive Steering

Steering in D

Sport or Normal

Steering in S

Sport or Normal

Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cruise Control

Adaptive or Normal

Driver Alert

Driver Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Driver Alert Display

Driver Alert Display

Intelligent AWD - Intelligent AWD on Demand Screen
Lane keeping Sys

Pre-Collision

Mode

Alert, Aid or Alert + Aid

Intensity

High, Normal or Low

Alert Sensitivity

High, Normal or Low

Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck disabled

109

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Driver Assist

Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Pressure - Tire Pressure on Demand Screen
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.

Settings
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between different driver setting choices.

Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Settings

Vehicle

Drive Control

Handling in D

Comfort, Normal or Sport

Handling in S

Normal or Sport

Performance in S

Normal or Sport

Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting

Adaptive Headlamps

110

MKZ (), enUSA

Adaptive Headlamps - check enabled or
uncheck disabled

Information Displays
Settings

Traffic Setup
Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolamp Delay

Select time interval

Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Welcome Lighting - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Locks

Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Unlocking

All doors or Driver door

Switches Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Neutral Towing

Hold OK to Initialize

Oil Life

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset

Power Decklid

Enabled switch or Disabled switch

Remote Start

Climate Control

Auto or Last Settings

Front Seats & Wheel or Front
Seats

Auto Heated or Off

111

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Settings

Duration

5, 10 or 15 minutes

System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Windows

Remote - check enabled or uncheck disabled

Wipers

Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled

MyKey

Display

Create MyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKey

911 Assist

Always On or User Selectable

Traction Control

Always On or User Selectable

Max Speed

Choose desired speed or off

Speed Minder

Choose desired speed or off

Volume Limiter

Always On or User Selectable

Do Not Disturb

Always On or User Selectable

Clear MyKeys

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys

Distance Unit

Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L

Temperature Unit

°Fahrenheit or °Celsius

112

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Settings

Tire Pressure

psi, kPa or BAR

Language

Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to Set

Speedometer in km/h - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.

Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
E145981

Active Park
Message

Action

Active Park Fault

Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

113

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message

Action

Adaptive Cruise Malfunction

Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 204).

Adaptive Cruise Not Available

Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 204).

Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/
mud/water in front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 204).

Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking
Turned Off

Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.

Front Sensor Not Aligned

Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging.

Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control

Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.

Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate

Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.

Adaptive Cruise Shift Down

Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and the driver
needs to shift the transmission into a lower gear.

114

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
AdvanceTrac™
Message

Action

Service AdvanceTrac

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

AdvanceTrac Off On

Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.

Message

Action

Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

Airbag

Alarm
Message

Action

Vehicle Alarm to Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm
(page 76).

115

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message

Action

Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds

Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.

Engine Shut Off for Fuel Economy

Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.

Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds Press Ok
to Override

Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering
wheel button to override the shut down.

AWD
Message

Action

AWD Temporarily Disabled

Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily disabled to protect itself from overheating.

AWD Off

Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused
by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating.

AWD Restored

The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance
with the road tire re-installed or after the system is allowed to cool.

AWD Malfunction Service Required

Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmission/AWD light when the AWD system
is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

116

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
Message

Action

Check Charging System

Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off

Displayed when the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition.
Various vehicle features will be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has
recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal

Turn Power Off to Save Battery

Displayed when the battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of
charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear
once the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off
unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

117

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message

Action

Blindspot System Fault

Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.

Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual

Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. See Blind Spot Information System (page 217).

Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X

Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 217).

Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual

Displayed when the blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are
blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 217).

Cross Traffic System Fault

Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Doors and Locks
Message

Action

X Door Ajar

Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving.
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.

Trunk Ajar

Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely closed.

Hood Ajar

Displays when the hood is not completely closed.

118

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Message

Action

Switches Inhibited Security Mode

Displays when the door switches have been disabled.

Child Lock Malfunction Service Required Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Factory Keypad Code XXXXX

Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been reset. See Keyless Entry (page
70).

Driver Alert
Message

Action

Driver Alert Warning Rest Now

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested

Take a rest break soon.

Fuel
Message

Action

Fuel Level Low

Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.

119

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Hill Start Assist
Message

Action

Hill Start Assist Not Available

Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your authorized dealer.

Keys and Intelligent Access
Message

Action

Press Brake to START

Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.

No Key Detected

Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 156).

Restart Now or Key is Needed

Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access
key is not detected inside the vehicle.

Run Power Active

Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.

Starting System Fault

This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See your
authorized dealer for service.

Key Program Successful

Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.

Key Program Failure

Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key has failed to be
programmed.

120

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Message

Action

Max Number of Keys Learned

Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.

Not Enough Keys Learned

Displayed during spare key programming when not enough keys have been programmed.

Key Battery Low Replace Soon

Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.

Could Not Program Integrated Key

Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.

Engine On

Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and the engine is on.

Lane Keeping System
Message

Action

Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required

The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen

The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.

Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required

The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Keep Hands on Steering Wheel

Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.

121

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Maintenance
Message

Action

LOW Engine Oil Pressure

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

Change Engine Oil Soon

Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 285).

Oil Change Required

Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 285).

Brake Fluid Level LOW

Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately.
See Brake Fluid Check (page 293).

Check Brake System

Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact your
authorized dealer.

Engine Coolant Overtemperature

Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high.

Washer Fluid Level Low

Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.

Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp

Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help reduce high coolant temperatures.

Transport / Factory Mode

Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some
features to operate properly. See your authorized dealer.

See Manual

Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.

122

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
MyKey
Message

Action

MyKey Not Created

Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed.

MyKey Active Drive Safely

Displays when MyKey is active.

Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h

Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.

Near Vehicle Top Speed

Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting

Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is reached.

Check Speed Drive Safely

Displays when MyKey is active.

Buckle Up to Unmute Audio

Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.

AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting

Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activated.

Traction Control On - MyKey Setting

Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is activated.

MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated

Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.

Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting

Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings.

123

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Park Aid
Message

Action

Check Front Park Aid

Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized
dealer. See Parking Aid (page 192).

Check Rear Park Aid

Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized
dealer. See Parking Aid (page 192).

Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Rear Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Park Brake
Message

Action

Park Brake Engaged

Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than
3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact your authorized
dealer.

Park Brake Malfunction Service Now

The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See your
authorized dealer.

Park Brake Not Applied

Displays when the electric parking brake is not set.

Park Brake Maintenance Mode

Displays when the electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.

124

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Message

Action

Park Brake Use Switch to Release

Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not been released.

Press Brake To Release Park Brake and
Switch

Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not been released and the vehicle is
moving.

Park Brake Limited Function Service
Required

The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.

Park Brake System Overheated

Displays when the electric parking brake was not released causing it to overheat.

Release Park Brake

Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the vehicle is started.

Park Brake Applied

Displays when the electric parking brake is set.

Park Brake Released

Displays when the electric parking brake is released.

Power Steering
Message

Action

Steering Fault Service Now

The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.

Steering Loss Stop Safely

The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a safe place. Contact your authorized
dealer.

Steering Assist Fault Service Required

The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
125

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
Message

Action

Pre-Collision Assist Malfunction

Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will
be disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility
Blocked See Manual
due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor
to resolve. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available

Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will
be disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Remote Start
Message

Action

To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift
Button

Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift button to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.

126

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Seats
Message

Action

Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving

Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.

Memory X Saved

Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.

Starting System
Message

Action

Press Brake to Start

Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.

Cranking Time Exceeded

Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start the vehicle.

Engine Start Pending Please Wait

Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.

Pending Start Cancelled

Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.

127

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message

Action

LOW Tire Pressure

Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 341).

Tire Pressure Monitor Fault

Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 341).

Tire Pressure Sensor Fault

Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 341). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Traction Control
Message

Action

Traction Control Off / Traction Control On

Displays when the traction control system has been switched off or on. See Using Traction
Control (page 188).

Spinout Detected Hazards Activated

Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard are activated.

128

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Transmission
Message

Action

Transmission Malfunction Service Now

See your authorized dealer.

Transmission Overheating Stop Safely

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.

Transmission Overtemperature Stop Safely The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Service Required

See your authorized dealer.

Transmission Too Hot Press Brake

Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.

Transmission Limited Function See Manual

Displays when the transmission has overheated and has limited functionality. See Automatic
Transmission (page 171).

Transmission Warming Up Please Wait

Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.

Transmission Not in Park

A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or recharging
the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
294).

Transmission Adjusted

Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.

Transmission Adapt Mode

Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.

Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup On

Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unable to select gears.

Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup Off

Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and free to select gears.

Invalid Gear Selection

Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.

129

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Message

Action

Press Brake Pedal

Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.

Depress Brake to Shift from Park

Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to enable the transmission to shift from
park.

Press N again to Enter Stay in Neutral
Mode

Displays when the neutral button N needs to be pressed again to enter neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission (page 171).

Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged

Displays when neutral hold is active. See Automatic Transmission (page 171).

Stay in Neutral Tow Engaged See Manual
to Disable

Displays when neutral hold is active. See (page 107).

SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the Vehicle

Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. See your authorized dealer.

SHIFT SYS FAULT Cannot Shift Trans Use Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
Park Brake to Secure Vehicle
the vehicle. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required

See your authorized dealer.

SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to
Park

Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to park. See your authorized
dealer.

SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required

Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to reverse. See your authorized
dealer.

SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required

See your authorized dealer.

130

MKZ (), enUSA

Information Displays
Message

Action

SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required

See your authorized dealer.

SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport Unavailable
Service Required

See your authorized dealer.

Neutral Tow Engaged Turn Ignition Off for
Towing

Displays when neutral tow is active and the ignition needs to be turned off. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 243).

Neutral Tow Engaged Depress Brake and Displays while attempting to exit neutral tow. The brake pedal needs to be depressed and park
Select Park to Exit Neutral Tow
button selected to deactivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 243).
Neutral Tow Remove Park Brake for
Towing

Displays when neutral tow is active and the park brake needs to be released. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 243).

Neutral Tow Disengaged

Displays when neutral tow has been deactivated.

131

MKZ (), enUSA

Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 389).

E146320

Driver temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle. This control
also adjusts the passenger side temperature when not in dual zone mode.

Fan speed control: Press on either side of the fan icon to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Passenger temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
This turns on dual zone mode.

132

MKZ (), enUSA

Climate Control
D

Power: Press the button to turn the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air
currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C
and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce
the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow modes during hot weather
in order to improve cooling efficiency.

A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.

MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.

AUTO: Press the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system
adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle
in order to maintain the desired temperature. You can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by pressing and
holding the button for more than two seconds.

Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 135).

Defrost: Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents and de-mister. Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell
vents turn off. You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

133

MKZ (), enUSA

Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach comfort
in hot weather, drive with the windows
slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start-up
or until your vehicle airs out.

Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.

Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Cooling the Interior Quickly
Press the MAX A/C button.

Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Heating the Interior Quickly

Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather

1. Press the AUTO button.

1. Press the defrost button.

134

MKZ (), enUSA

2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
3. Direct the instrument panel side air vents
toward the side windows.
4. Close the instrument panel vents.

Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. This may
cause damage to the heated rear window
grid lines. The vehicle warranty does not
cover damage caused to the heated rear
window grid lines.

Heated Exterior Mirror

HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
E72507
and fog. Press the button to
switch the system off. The heated rear
window will automatically turn off after a
short period of time.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and
mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
The heated exterior mirrors will remove ice,
mist and fog. When you switch the heated
rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors
will automatically turn on.

CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter. It is located behind the glove box.
135

MKZ (), enUSA

The particulate filtration system reduces the
concentration of airborne particles such as
dust, spores and pollen in the air supplied to
the interior of your vehicle.
Note: To prevent foreign objects from
entering the system, make sure the cabin air
is in place at all times. Running the system
without a filter in place could result in
degradation or damage to the system.
The particulate filtration system gives you
and your passengers the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 487).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.

Climate Control
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your previous settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system to
its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back on,
such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.

Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on previous settings). The
rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated
seats do not automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically switch on.

You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
107).

136

MKZ (), enUSA

Seats
•

SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.

•
•
•
E68595

When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.

137

MKZ (), enUSA

Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.

Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.

Seats
WARNINGS
The adjustable head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible, it
should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust
the head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.

Front seat head restraint

Rear center head restraint

Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
E138645

E138642

Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.

Rear seat outboard head restraints

The head restraints consist of:
A

an energy absorbing head restraint

two steel stems

guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button

guide sleeve unlock and remove
button

Adjusting the Head Restraint

E153105

Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.

138

MKZ (), enUSA

Seats
Lowering the Head Restraint

Tilting Head Restraints

1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.

The front head restraints have a tilting
feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head
restraint, do the following:

Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.

After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward
again will then release it to the rearward,
untilted position.

POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the front seat or seatback
while your vehicle is moving. This may
result in sudden seat movement, causing the
loss of control of your vehicle.

Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.

Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.

E144727

1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.

139

MKZ (), enUSA

2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.

Seats

E144632

140

MKZ (), enUSA

Seats
Power Lumbar

Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off after
20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.

E156301

E165608

Massage mode

Back massage intensity adjustment

Massage intensity decrease and off

Upper lumbar
Lumbar decrease

Cushion massage intensity adjustment

Massage intensity increase

Lumbar increase

On and off

141

MKZ (), enUSA

Lumbar and bolster mode

Lower lumbar

Seats
1

The massage feature will default to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature will default to the middle
lumbar mode.

1. Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour Seats.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press OFF, LO or HI.

Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
E142607

Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour
Seats.

When switched on, the system displays
directions for you to adjust the lumbar
settings in your seat or to set the massage
function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:

MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver seat, power mirrors and
optional power steering column. The memory
control is located on the driver door.

1. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
2. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
142

MKZ (), enUSA

E142554

Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and
power steering column to your desired
position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.

Seats
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The seat, mirrors and steering column will
move to the position stored for that preset.
Note: A pre-set memory position can only
be recalled when the ignition is off, or when
the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
if the ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
65).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off will
move the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any seat or mirror adjustment
control (or any memory button) during a
memory recall cancels the operation.

Seat recall movement will also stop if you
drive your vehicle.

Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls or
intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone will sound
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or IA key is in range, the memory function
will move to the settings of the first key
stored.

143

MKZ (), enUSA

Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to two inches (five
centimeters) when you switch the ignition
off.
The driver seat will return to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 107).

REAR SEATS
Note: Your vehicle may have split seatbacks
that you must fold individually.
Note: Make sure the center safety belt is
unbuckled before folding the seatback.
To lower the seat back(s) from inside the
vehicle, do the following:

Seats
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
WARNING

E144634

1. Pull the handle to release the seatback.
2. Push the seatback forward.

People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.

E164098

3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage clip.
This will prevent the safety belt from
getting caught in the seat latch.
When raising the seat back(s), make sure you
hear the seat latch into place.
144

MKZ (), enUSA

Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.

145

MKZ (), enUSA

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

Seats
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)

Heated Seats

WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.

E146322

Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.

Cooled Seats (If Equipped)
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.

146

MKZ (), enUSA

Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST

E146309

To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and off.
Cooler settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.

E144635

If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.

Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder. To open the storage lid, pull
up on the latch located between the
cupholders.

Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement (if equipped)

Armrest pass-through

Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.

Note: Do not exceed 80 pounds (36
kilograms) of weight on the pass-through
door.

147

MKZ (), enUSA

E152622

Release the latch, then pull down on the door
located in the back of the armrest. You can
store cargo of a longer length such as skis
or lumber.

Universal Garage Door Opener
HomeLink Wireless Control System (If
Equipped)

WARNING
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.

Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the function button
codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the function button
codes later in this section.

Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com or by calling
the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
In-vehicle programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.

E142657

The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.

148

MKZ (), enUSA

The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.

Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.

Universal Garage Door Opener
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for five seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
E142658

1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters)
away from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.

If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. See Programming
your garage door motor later in this section.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
Do the following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while
you press and release the hand-held
transmitter button every 2 seconds. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly once the HomeLink function
button recognizes and accepts the hand-held
transmitter’s radio frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button,
begin programming your garage door opener
motor.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
149

MKZ (), enUSA

E142659

To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming your garage door opener
motor
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.

Universal Garage Door Opener
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener

E142660

1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.

150

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.

Universal Garage Door Opener

E142661

Red indicator light

Green indicator light

1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.

4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.

151

MKZ (), enUSA

Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.

E142662

1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.

Universal Garage Door Opener
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.

FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

152

MKZ (), enUSA

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use of the
lighter can cause damage not covered by
your warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.

Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.

Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so my cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
discharging accidentally:
•

Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will discharge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.

•

Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.

WARNING

Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the
power point.

Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•
•
•

In the front of the center console.
Inside the center console storage bin.
On the rear of the center console.
E143941

153

MKZ (), enUSA

Auxiliary Power Points
You can use the power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is on the rear of the center console.
When the indicator light, located on the
power point is:
• On — power point is ready to supply
power.
• Off — power point power supply is off;
ignition is not on.
• Flashing — power point is in fault mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on,
but do not plug your device back in. Let the
system cool off and switch the ignition off to
reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back
on and make sure the indicator light remains
on.

Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices which process precise
data, for example medical equipment or
measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply, for example
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch sensor lamps.

154

MKZ (), enUSA

Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or collisions, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:

Storage compartment with auxiliary
power point and media hub

Auxiliary power point, 110 volt AC
power point

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E146582
E75193

Front storage bin with auxiliary
power point

Cupholders

Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.

155

MKZ (), enUSA

Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the vehicle.
156

MKZ (), enUSA

Ignition Modes

E164319

Starting and Stopping the Engine
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
• Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode,
or when the vehicle is running but is
not moving.
• On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
• Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button until the vehicle starts. An
indicator light on the button
illuminates when then ignition is on
and when the vehicle starts.

STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in P.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:

157

MKZ (), enUSA

E155835

1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in the
cupholder. Place the remote in the
backup slot (B) at the bottom of the
cupholder.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the START button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.

Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
the engine within 20 seconds of switching it
off, even if a valid key is not present.

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without the
key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If you
open and close a door while the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid key.
You cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.

Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.

Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears in
the information display alerting you that you
exceeded the cranking time. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to
a 15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.

Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If

158

MKZ (), enUSA

you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the
engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to inform
you that the engine has shut down in order
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic engine shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at
the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:

Starting and Stopping the Engine
•

•

You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on (for the current ignition cycle only).
Use the information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 107).
During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press OK
or RESET (depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily switch
the feature off (for the current ignition
cycle only).

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.

Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put the
transmission in position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within two
seconds.
159

MKZ (), enUSA

4. Apply the parking brake.

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.

Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
•
•

Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm).
Set your climate control to outside air.

Starting and Stopping the Engine
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.

We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.

160

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.

Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.

WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or
use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor
is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
•

•
•

Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.

161

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.

Fuel and Refueling
•

•

Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors, or skin contact could
cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or
sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly
with soap and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.

FUEL QUALITY
We recommend that you use only high
quality fuel without additives or other engine
treatments.

Choosing the Right Fuel

Octane Recommendations

Use only UNLEADED gasoline or UNLEADED
gasoline blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol in your gasoline vehicle.

2.0L EcoBoost Engine

Do not use:
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E-85 fuel.
• Fuel with methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
Note: Use of any fuel other than
recommended fuel can cause powertrain
damage, impair the emission control system
or cause loss of vehicle performance. Any
damage to your vehicle that is caused by
use of fuel not recommended will not be
covered under warranty.

162

MKZ (), enUSA

We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87.
Premium fuel will provide improved
performance and is recommended for severe
duty usage.
3.7L Engine
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87.

Fuel and Refueling
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving conditions
while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, see an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

•

•
E161513

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

You may need to cycle the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. On
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal. With keyless
ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of
fuel is enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gallon (3.8 liters) may
be required.
The service engine soon indicator may
come on. For more information on the
service engine soon indicator, See
Warning Lamps and Indicators (page
102).

Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
powertrain components.

WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of portable
fuel containers or aftermarket funnels
into the capless fuel system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and
may cause fuel to run onto the ground
instead of filling the tank, which could result
in serious personal injury.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it. The included fuel funnel
has been specially designed to work safely
with your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a
portable fuel container, use the funnel
included with the vehicle.

If you have run out of fuel:

163

MKZ (), enUSA

Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container

Fuel and Refueling

E162864

1. Locate the portable funnel that comes
with your vehicle. The funnel is located
behind the left-hand side rear seat, under
the carpet. Fold down the left-hand side
rear seat back. Pull back the piece of
carpet to access the funnel.

164

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuel and Refueling
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly
dispose of it. Extra funnels can be
purchased from your authorized dealer
if you choose to dispose of the funnel.

Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:

REFUELING

E157279

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless
fuel system.

WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.

3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable
fuel container.

•

Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
Do not use a device that would hold the
fuel pump handle in the fill position.

•

Switch off your engine when you are
refueling.

•

Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System

Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.

165

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island.

Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.

E157280

WARNINGS
Do not use personal electronic devices
while refueling.

WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.

Fuel and Refueling
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.

E154765

E156032

E166527

2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.

Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler nozzle
higher while you insert the nozzle for easier
access.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into
the fuel system to open both doors.
Leave the nozzle fully inserted until you
have stopped pumping fuel.

166

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Allow about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler
nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain
back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the
vehicle.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank to the point that the fuel is able to
bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled
fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.

Fuel and Refueling
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the
center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release. The fuel door will latch
closed.
If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, a
Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any
visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill
funnel provided with the vehicle, several
times to allow the inlet to close properly.
This will dislodge any debris preventing
the inlet from sealing.

If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It may
take several driving cycles for the message
to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an
engine start-up (after four or more hours with
the engine off) followed by city or highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the message
on may cause the service engine soon lamp
to turn on as well.

FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range. When refueling
your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates
empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still
present in the tank.

Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel tank
is the amount of fuel that can be put into the
tank after the gauge indicates empty. The
advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size
– it is the combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.

Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•

•
•

Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.

Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.

167

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuel and Refueling
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving
(this is your engine’s break-in period); a more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense,
frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings
are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill
the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles
traveled by gallons used (For Metric:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide
by kilometers traveled).

Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how
temperature impacts fuel economy. In
general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel
economy.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.

168

MKZ (), enUSA

Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work properly:
•
•
•

•

Use only the specified fuel listed.
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford
parts should be the equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.

Fuel and Refueling
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with an on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the
engine’s emission control system. This
system protects the environment by ensuring
that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II
system also assists your authorized dealer
in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
•
•
•
•

the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
the fuel fill inlet may not have been
properly closed See Refueling (page 165).
driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.

169

MKZ (), enUSA

You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.

Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments
may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from
getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
you may need to have the vehicle
serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the

ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may
need to perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours
without starting the engine. Then, start the
engine and complete the above driving
cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started, do not
turn off the engine until the above driving
cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not
ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat
the above driving cycle.

170

MKZ (), enUSA

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Understanding the Positions of your
Electronic Transmission

WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure your vehicle is in P (Park).
Turn the ignition off whenever you leave your
vehicle.

Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out of
P (Park).

Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.

1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on the
instrument panel of the gear you want to
select.
3. The gearshift button you select will
illuminate and the selected gear will
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
Note: If you attempt to leave your vehicle
while it is in gear, the vehicle will
automatically shift into P (Park). Safety belt
and door monitors determine your intent and
make the shift for you. During this time, a
Transmission not in Park message will
appear in the information display screen
prompting you to make the shift.

Putting your vehicle in gear:

E146223

Every time a gear is selected, the selected
button will light up. You will also see the gear
selected appear in the instrument cluster.

Push Button Shift Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
transmission. The shift buttons are located
on the instrument panel next to the
MyLincoln Touch™ system. The gears are
selected by pressing and releasing the
PRNDS buttons.
E155989

171

MKZ (), enUSA

Transmission
Note: To put your vehicle in gear with the
door open, perform steps 1-4. See the
Automatic Return to Park section in this
chapter for more information on this feature.
P (Park)
With the transmission in P (Park), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the front
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of P (Park). An audible chime
sounds once you select P (Park).
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle
will automatically shift into P (Park). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into N (Neutral) until
a slow enough speed is reached. The vehicle
will then shift into P (Park) automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate when your
vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral
tow.

•
•
•

You turn the ignition off
You open the driver's door with your
safety belt unlatched
Your safety belt is unlatched while the
driver's door is open

If you turn the ignition off while your vehicle
is moving, your vehicle will first shift into N
(Neutral) until it slows down enough to shift
into P (Park) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period
of time, (2-15 minutes) before starting your
vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will cause
this feature to activate, even with the driver's
door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your
door ajar indicator does not illuminate when
you open the driver’s door or the indicator
illuminates with the driver’s door closed. See
your authorized dealer.

Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into P (Park)
when any of the following conditions occur:

172

MKZ (), enUSA

R (Reverse)
With the transmission in R (Reverse), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the transmission in N (Neutral), you can
start your vehicle and it is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to
stay in N (Neutral) when you exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this
mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the N (Neutral) button on your
shifter assembly.
2. The message Press N to enter Stay in
Neutral mode will appear in your
information display screen.
3. Press the N (Neutral) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.

Transmission
The message Stay in Neutral mode
engaged will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.

S (Sport)
Putting the vehicle in S (Sport):
•

Note: During this mode the N button will
flash continuously and your instrument
cluster will display N as the selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode

•

To disable Stay in Neutral mode select
another gear. See the Putting the Vehicle
in Gear for instructions on how to do this.

•

Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
D (Drive)

Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking
Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy
Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds

You can achieve extensive manual control
by pressing the S (Sport) button.
•
•

Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
Paddle Shifters

The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy.

173

MKZ (), enUSA

With your vehicle in D (Drive), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.

E144821

Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:

Transmission

Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)

Gear Upshift

mph (km/h)

From

15 mph (24 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

40 mph (64 km/h)

45 mph (72 km/h)

50 mph (80 km/h)
The transmission will automatically upshift if
your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.

The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.

Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you make another shift button selection.
For example, D (Drive).

Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.

E155990

174

MKZ (), enUSA

Transmission
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park which
means the vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.

1. Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this
procedure.

If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead
battery.

Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
E152215

2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access
slot. The slot is located below the media
hub, in your center console storage bin.
The access slot does not have a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the media
hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel will flash when
your vehicle is in override mode.

175

MKZ (), enUSA

4. With the override switch still held, press
the N (Neutral button) to shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in Neutral
mode for wrecker towing purposes or
can be shifted to the desired gear and
driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.

This feature increases durability and provides
consistent shift feel over the life of your
vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm or soft shifts. This operation will
not affect function or durability of your
transmission and is normal. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, the
strategy must be relearned whenever the
battery is disconnected or a new battery is
installed.

Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if your engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to your transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to your transmission
and tires may occur, or your engine may
overheat.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you can help rock your vehicle out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

176

MKZ (), enUSA

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all the time
and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not for off-road
use. The AWD feature gives your vehicle
some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those
conditions could subject the vehicle to
excessive stress which might result in
damage not covered under your warranty.
Note: A warning message will display in the
information display when an AWD system
fault is present See Information Messages
(page 113). An AWD system fault will cause
the AWD system to default to front-wheel
drive only mode. When this warning
message displays, have your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.

Note: A warning message will display in the
information display if the AWD system has
overheated. See Information Messages
(page 113). This condition may occur if the
vehicle operates in extreme conditions with
excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To
resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine restarts and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the warning
message will turn off and normal AWD
function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the mini-spare
tire is installed, the AWD system may disable
automatically and enter front-wheel drive
only mode to protect driveline components.
This condition will be indicated by a warning
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 113). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should turn
off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced
normal road tire and cycling the ignition off
and on. It is recommended to reinstall the

177

MKZ (), enUSA

repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between
the front and rear axles could cause the AWD
system to stop functioning and default to
front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system.

Driving In Special Conditions With AllWheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•

•

Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•

•

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is in P
(Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position
or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop
button and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
If you fully release the parking brake,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.

178

MKZ (), enUSA

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow you
may be able to rock it out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
•

In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel
only as rapidly and as far as required to
avoid the emergency). Excessive steering
will result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, utilize smooth
variations of the accelerator and/or brake
pedal pressure if changes in vehicle
speed are called for. Avoid abrupt

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

•

steering, acceleration or braking which
could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road
surface to return the vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
the vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.

Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand.
This will cause the AWD system to overheat.
After the system has cooled down, normal
AWD function will return.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.

179

MKZ (), enUSA

E142667

Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by moving your vehicle slowly while applying
light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
the axle lubricant and AWD PTU (Power
Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked
and changed if necessary.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Lincoln Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side.
Do not drive in reverse over a hill without
the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.

180

MKZ (), enUSA

Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.

Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 183). for more information on the
operation of the anti-lock brake system
(ABS).

181

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle are designed and tested to
provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Lincoln Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do
not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lowering kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts
not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Lincoln Motor Company
recommends that you use caution with any
vehicle equipped with a high load or device
(such as ladder or luggage racks).

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended
if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.

182

MKZ (), enUSA

Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 309).

E144522

See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 102).

Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.

Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.

183

MKZ (), enUSA

This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
E144522

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTILOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.

Brakes
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes. As a result, you may notice various
noises when you apply and release the
electric parking brake. This is normal and no
cause for concern.

Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.

Applying the electric parking brake
WARNING

The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and leave
your vehicle with the transmission in
park (P).

If the brake system warning lamp does
not illuminate or flashes, there could
be a problem with your electric parking
brake. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds if you switch the
ignition off after you apply the electric
parking brake, or you apply the electric
parking brake after you switch the ignition
off.

184

MKZ (), enUSA

E169085

Pull the switch to apply the electric parking
brake.
The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate to confirm that the electric parking
brake has been applied. See Information
Displays (page 107).

Brakes
Applying the electric parking brake
when the vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use the
electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked), do not
apply the electric parking brake while the
vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions, emergency
braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of
control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
tone will sound. See Information Displays
(page 107).

If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as long
as the switch is applied. Release or press the
switch, or press the accelerator pedal to stop
the braking force.

Releasing the electric parking brake

WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after you
have released the parking brake, there could
be a problem with your braking system. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric parking
brake by:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. Pressing the brake pedal.
3. Pressing the electric parking brake
switch.

E169086

Release the electric parking brake either
manually by pressing the bottom of the
switch or automatically.

When you release the electric parking brake,
the brake system warning lamp will turn off.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the grade and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a slope.

185

MKZ (), enUSA

Manual release

Brakes
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1. Pull the switch and hold it in this position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.

Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has sufficient
drive force to move up the hill. To assure
drive away release when starting uphill,
press the accelerator pedal quickly.

Automatic release - drive away release

Battery With No Charge

Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if:
• The driver door is closed.
• The vehicle is accelerated.
• There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.

WARNING
You will not be able to apply or release
the electric parking brake if the battery
is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.

WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
Failure to leave your vehicle securely parked
may lead to a crash or injury. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 184).
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. At all times, you
are responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The system will turn off if a malfunction
is apparent or if you rev the engine
excessively. Failure to take care may result
in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.

The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that you have released the electric
parking brake.

The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.

186

MKZ (), enUSA

HILL START ASSIST

Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
system releases the brakes automatically
once the engine has developed sufficient
drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling
down the slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, for example from a
car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.
Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) when
facing downhill and first gear (1) when facing
uphill.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the
brake pedal pressed.

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the
slope without rolling away for about two
to three seconds. This hold time
automatically extends if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.

Switching the System On and Off
When you switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on. You can switch the
system on or off in the information display.
See General Information (page 107). The
system remains off until you switch the
ignition off.

187

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: For vehicles with a manual
transmission, the system can be switched
on or off.
Note: For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the system cannot be switched
off.

Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations for example, stuck in
snow or mud, turning the traction control off
may be beneficial as this allows the wheels
to spin with full engine power. Depending
on the type of system you have on your
vehicle, you can either turn the system off
using the information display or by pressing
the button.

Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls (If Equipped)
Your vehicle comes with this feature already
enabled. If required, you can switch this
feature off using the information display
controls. See General Information (page
107).

Switching the System Off Using a
Switch (If Equipped)
The button is located in the instrument panel.
Press the button. You will see a message in
conjunction with an illuminated icon in the
display. Press the button again to return the
system to normal mode.
When you switch the traction control system
off, stability control remains fully active.

WARNING
If a failure has been detected within
the AdvanceTrac system, the stability
control light will illuminate steadily. Verify
that the AdvanceTrac system was not
manually disabled through the information
display. If the stability control light still
illuminates steadily, have the system serviced
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac
disabled could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on engine
E138639
start-up and flashes when a driving
condition activates the stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when you
turn the traction control system off.

188

MKZ (), enUSA

System Indicator Lights and Messages

Traction Control
When you turn the traction control system
off or on, a message appears in the
information display showing system status.

189

MKZ (), enUSA

Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of the
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the AdvanceTrac system. In
addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers
may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and the
front seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the
AdvanceTrac system could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

WARNINGS
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded their
ability to grip the road; this could reduce the
operator’s ability to control the vehicle
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If your AdvanceTrac system activates,
SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac Control system helps you
keep control of your vehicle when on a
slippery surface. The electronic stability
control portion of the system helps avoid
skids and lateral slides. The traction control
system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss
of traction. See Using Traction Control
(page 188).

Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
190

MKZ (), enUSA

B
B
A
A

E72903

Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
skidding off its intended route.

Vehicle with AdvanceTrac
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.

Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac®
The system automatically activates when you
start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac system
cannot be completely turned off, but the
electronic stability control system is disabled
when the transmission selector lever is in
position R. You can turn off the traction
control portion of the system independently.
See Using Traction Control (page 188).

191

MKZ (), enUSA

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PARKING AID (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.

WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging the
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.

192

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, it is possible to prevent turning the
sensing system off. See MyKey™ (page 59).
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever you switch the
ignition on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the radio
volume returns to the previous level.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). If your vehicle
is equipped with a front sensing system, you
can switch the system off using the parking
aid switch. See General Information (page
107).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display
and you cannot switch the system on through
the pop-up message or parking aid switch.
See Information Messages (page 113).

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.

The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R):
• Moving toward a stationary object at a
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• Not moving, but a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at a
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• Moving at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) and a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at a
speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 feet (1.8
meters) from the rear bumper.
There is decreased coverage area
at the outer corners of the bumper.

193

MKZ (), enUSA

The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 11.81 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the center stack display
(if equipped). The distance indication is
present when the transmission is in reverse
(R).
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases (obstacle becomes closer),
the indicator blocks will illuminate and
move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks show greyed
out.

Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).

Additionally, the system provides obstacle
distance indication through the center stack
display (if equipped). The distance indication
is present when the transmission is in reverse
(R).
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases (obstacle becomes closer),
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks show greyed
out.

E130382

Coverage area of up to 27 inches
(70 centimeters) from the front of
the vehicle and about 6–14 inches
(15–35 centimeters) to the side of
the front end of the vehicle. Refer
to the reverse sensing section for
details on coverage area.

If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when the vehicle is moving and the detected
obstacle is moving towards the vehicle. Once
the vehicle reaches a standstill condition, the
audio warning stops after 2 seconds.

194

MKZ (), enUSA

For automatic transmissions, if the gearshift
is in neutral (N), the system provides obstacle
distance indication through the center stack
display (if equipped). The front sensing
system provides visual warnings when the
vehicle is moving at a speed below 5 mph
(8 km/h) and an obstacle is located inside
the front or rear sensing detection areas.
Once the vehicle reaches a standstill
condition, the visual warnings stop after 4
seconds.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
If the gearshift is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S),
manual transmissions), the front sensing
system provides audio warnings when the
vehicle is moving and the system detects an
obstacle inside the front sensing detection
area. Once the vehicle reaches a standstill
condition, the audio warning stops after 2
seconds.
Additionally, the system provides distance
indication through the center stack display
(if equipped). The distance indication is
present if the vehicle is moving and an
obstacle is located inside the front sensing
detection area. Once the vehicle reaches a
standstill condition, the visual warnings stop
after 4 seconds, unless the detected obstacle
is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the
bumper.
For specific information on the reverse
sensing portion of the system, refer to that
section.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING
This system is designed to be a
supplementary park aid. It may not
work in all conditions and is not intended to
replace the driver’s attention and judgment.
The driver is responsible for avoiding
hazards and maintaining a safe distance and
speed, even when the system is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that cause
disruptive reflections.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers the
vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes.
The system visually and audibly instructs you
to park the vehicle.

195

MKZ (), enUSA

The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front bumper
and the parking space (for example, a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high from the
ground (such as a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
You should not use the system if:
• A foreign object (such as a bike rack or
trailer) is attached to the front or rear of
the vehicle or at another location close
to the sensors.
• An overhanging object (such as a
surfboard) is attached to the roof.
• The front bumper or side sensors are
damaged (in a collision) or obstructed by
a foreign object (such as a front bumper
cover).
• A mini-spare tire is in use.

Using Active Park Assist
E146186

Press the button located on the
right-hand side of the center stack.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The touch screen displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the

direction indicator to indicate which side of
the vehicle you want the system to search
on.

Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on the
passenger side of the vehicle.

E130107

When the system finds a suitable space, the
touch screen displays a message and a tone
sounds. Slow down and stop when the touch
screen displays a message and a chime
sounds (at approximately position A), then
follow the instructions on the touch screen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.

Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (such
as a bus or a truck), active park assist may
not detect street furniture and other items.
You must make sure the system selects a
space suitable for parking.
Note: Drive the vehicle as parallel to other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if the
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).

196

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the touch screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce vehicle
speed.

Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the system turns off and you need
to take full control of the vehicle.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
When you shift the transmission into reverse
(R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), the
vehicle steers itself into the space.

Instructions to safely move your vehicle back
and forth in the space display in the touch
screen and a tone sounds.

E130108

When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied
by a touch screen display message and a
tone), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
touch screen displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is done. The driver is responsible
for checking the parking job and make any
necessary corrections before putting the
transmission in park (P).

Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
The system can be deactivated manually by:
• Pressing the active park assist button.
• Grabbing the steering wheel.
• Driving above approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) for 10 seconds during an active
park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control system.

197

MKZ (), enUSA

Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control can activate on a slippery
or loose surface.
• An anti-lock brake system activation or
failure.
• If something touches the steering wheel.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays and a tone
sounds. Occasional system messages may

occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.

Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R), the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space.

The system does not offer a particular space

Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors.
There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The vehicle is farther than 4.9 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space.
The vehicle is closer than 15.75 in (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles.
The transmission is in reverse (R), the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space.

198

MKZ (), enUSA

Parking Aids (If Equipped)

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (for example, rolling forward when you select reverse [R]).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be in the correct position.
You drove the vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (for example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (for example, a salt sprayer, snowplow, or a moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (for instance, driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).

REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.

WARNINGS

Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.

Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the trunk is ajar. If the trunk
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines (if enabled) have been removed
when the trunk is ajar.

Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.

199

MKZ (), enUSA

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in reverse (R).
Make sure your vehicle is not moving.

Using the Rear View Camera System

The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
The image will display in either the rear view
mirror or the display in the center of the
instrument panel.

The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline (if applicable): Helps align the
center of your vehicle with an object
(trailer).

During operation, lines will appear in the
display that represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your vehicle.

E152548

The camera is located on the trunk near the
high-mount brake lamp.

The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).

The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to damage
to the rear of your vehicle.

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment is ajar, no rear
view camera features will display.

To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when the
transmission is not in reverse (R):
• Menu > Vehicle > Camera Settings

Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.

After changing a system setting, the touch
screen shows a preview of the selected
features.

200

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
and you might not see some objects. In some
vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once
you connect the trailer tow connector.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).

B C

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

Fixed guideline: Red zone

Rear bumper

Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.

Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on your steering wheel
position. When your steering wheel position
is straight, the active guidelines are not
visible.

F
E142436

Active guidelines

Centerline

Fixed guideline: Green zone

201

MKZ (), enUSA

Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of your
vehicle.

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Enhanced Park Aids
Note: Enhanced park aids are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when the reverse sensing system
detects an object. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. You can disable the
reverse sensing alert if you have enhanced
park aids enabled, you will still see the
displayed highlighted areas.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle is not shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R). When
you shift the transmission out of reverse (R),
the feature automatically turns off and you
must enable it to use it again.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until
your vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h)
or until you select a radio button.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.

202

MKZ (), enUSA

Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).

Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while driving
uphill.

When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear to assist the
system in maintaining the set speed. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, you will return to the speed that you
previously set.
•
E145976

The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.

•

Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.

E71340

The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
•

Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.

203

MKZ (), enUSA

The indicator changes colors in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed

USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery. This could result in
loss of vehicle control, serious injury or
death.

2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h in your information
display, the set speed change in
approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
increments. When you select mph in your
information display, the set speed
changes in approximately 1.0 mph
(1.61 km/h) increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.

Cruise Control
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will
not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.

WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Switching Cruise Control Off

Adaptive cruise control does not detect
pedestrians or objects in the roadway.

Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.

Adaptive cruise control does not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

Press and release OFF or switch the ignition
off.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions, especially when using
adaptive cruise control. Adaptive cruise
control cannot replace attentive driving.
Failing to follow any of the warnings below
or failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control
when entering or leaving a highway, in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery or unpaved.
Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
fog, rain, spray or snow.

Switching the System On
Press and release ON.

E144529

Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.

204

MKZ (), enUSA

E195438

The controls for using your cruise control are
located on the steering wheel.

E164805

The information display shows the
grey indicator light.

Cruise Control
The current gap setting and SET also display.

Following a Vehicle

Setting a Speed

WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does your vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to
do so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.

1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. The vehicle
speed is stored in the memory.
3. The information display shows a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Adaptive cruise control only warns of
radar-sensor-detected vehicles. In
some cases there may be no warning or a
delayed warning. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
E164805

5. A lead vehicle graphic illuminates when
the system detects a vehicle in front of
you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.

Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
the adaptive cruise control system is active.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance
setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.

205

MKZ (), enUSA

When you are following a vehicle and you
switch on your left directional indicator,
adaptive cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
The vehicle maintains a constant distance
between the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 12 mph (20
km/h).
• A new gap distance is set.
The vehicle applies brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. The maximum braking which
the system can apply is limited. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level is insufficient, an audible
warning sounds while the system continues
to brake. The red warning bar appears on
the windshield. You should take immediate
action.

Cruise Control
Setting the Gap Distance

You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you by pressing the gap control.

Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.

A
B

E195439

E164805

Gap decrease.

Gap increase.

The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.

Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Set speed

Graphic display, bars indicated between vehicles

Time gap, seconds

62 (100)

31 (28)

Sport.

62 (100)

1.4

43 (39)

Normal.

62 (100)

1.8

55 (50)

Normal.

62 (100)

2.2

67 (61)

Comfort.

mph ( km/h)

Dynamic behavior

yd (m)

206

MKZ (), enUSA

Distance gap

Cruise Control
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
slower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
to the previously set speed. The set speed
displays continuously in the information
display while the system is active.

Press the brake pedal or press and release
CNCL. The last set speed displays in grey
but does not erase.

Changing the Set Speed

Low Speed Automatic Cancellation

•

Overriding the System

•

The system does not function at speeds
below 12 mph (20 km/h). An audible alarm
sounds and the automatic braking releases
if your vehicle drops below this speed.

Each time you start the vehicle, the system
selects the last chosen gap for the current
driver.

Disengaging the System

WARNING
Whenever the driver presses the
accelerator pedal and overrides the
system, the system does not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain the set distance
from any vehicle ahead.
Press the accelerator pedal to override the
set speed and gap distance.
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
E144529
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the information
display.

•

Accelerate or brake to the desired speed,
then press and release SET+.
Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
gradually changes to the selected speed.
Press and release SET+ or SET-. The set
speed changes in approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h) increments.

The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.

207

MKZ (), enUSA

Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it is applying brakes
for an extended period of time. This allows
the brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes cool.
Select a lower gear during prolonged
downhill driving on steep slopes, such as
mountainous areas, when the system is
active. In such situations, the system needs
additional engine braking to reduce the load
on the vehicle’s regular brake system to
prevent the brakes from overheating.

Cruise Control
Switching the System Off

Detection issues can occur:

Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.

With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected
once they have moved fully into
your lane.

Motorcyclists may be detected
late, or not at all.

With vehicles in front of you when
going into and coming out of a
bend. The detection beam will not
follow sharp curves in the road.

Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.

Detection Issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.

In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert
and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. See an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.

E71621

208

MKZ (), enUSA

Cruise Control
System Not Available

Blocked Sensor

Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.

WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing a
trailer with brake controls. Aftermarket
trailer brakes do not function properly when
you switch the system on because the
brakes are electronically controlled. Failing
to do so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury. The
system does operate with non-electronic
trailer brake controllers, such as over-run or
surge brakes.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system. Failing
to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.

209

MKZ (), enUSA

E145632

A message appears if something obstructs
the sensor's radar signals. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. The system cannot detect
a vehicle ahead and does not function when
something obstructs the radar signal. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for this message displaying.

Cruise Control

Cause

Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
in the display.
that it is free from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
with the radar signals.
any vehicles ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition
either self clears or clears after a you restart
your vehicle.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.

Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
for slower vehicles. Always be aware
of which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.

210

MKZ (), enUSA

You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, the system does not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking does not activate.

Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed to
aid you. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform you that the
system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.

The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.

Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display by selecting Settings
then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the
menu. When activated, the system will
monitor your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.

System Display
When active the system will run automatically
in the background and only issue a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
(page 107).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.

System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).

Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.

E131358

211

MKZ (), enUSA

The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning

Driving Aids
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.

Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph (64
km/h), the alertness level will change to grey
for a short time and the information display
will inform you that the system is unavailable.
Resetting the System

E131359

You can reset the system by either:

The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.

•
•

The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is with the typical
range.

Switching the ignition off and on.
Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace your
attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).

212

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands
on the steering wheel. The system may
detect a light grip or touch on the steering
wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out of
your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.

Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.

Driving Aids
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the Mode
and Intensity settings.
E144813

Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.

Press the button located on the left
steering wheel stalk to switch the
system on or off.

A
B

System Settings
The system has two optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings, See
General Information (page 107). The system
stores the last-known selection for each of
these settings. You do not need to readjust
your settings each time you turn on the
system.

E165515

Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.

E165517

Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features you can enable.

Alert

Aid

Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center. If your
vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the
system provides a steering wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.

E165516

213

MKZ (), enUSA

Driving Aids
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the alert
and alert + aid modes. This setting does not
affect the aid mode.
•
•
•

Low
Medium
High

System Display

When you switch on the system, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
display in the information display. If you
select aid mode when you switch on the
system, a separate white icon will also
appear or in some vehicles arrows will
display with the lane markings.

•

When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
•

E151660

•

•
•

Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
The turn indicator is active.
Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.

The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog), traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).

See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
•
•

214

MKZ (), enUSA

Quick braking.
Fast acceleration.

Driving Aids
•

Using the turn signal indicator.

•

Evasive steering maneuver.

Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road

215

MKZ (), enUSA

Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?

Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads

Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified

216

MKZ (), enUSA

Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®)
with Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
BLIS as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS
is not a replacement for careful driving.

BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that may
have entered the blind spot zone (A). The
detection area is on both sides of the vehicle,
extending rearward from the exterior mirrors
to approximately 9.8 ft (3 m) beyond the
bumper. The system alerts you if certain
vehicles enter the blind spot zone while
driving.
Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles
approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: BLIS is not designed to prevent
contact with other vehicles or objects; or to
detect parked vehicles, people, animals or
infrastructure (for example, fences, guardrails
or trees). It is designed to alert the driver to
vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.

A
E124788

217

MKZ (), enUSA

Using the Systems
BLIS turns on when the vehicle is started and
is driven forward above 5 mph (8 km/h); it
remains on while the transmission is in drive
(D) or neutral (N). If shifted out of drive (D) or
neutral (N), the system enters cross traffic
alert mode. Once shifted back into drive (D),
BLIS turns back on when the vehicle is driven
above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: BLIS does not function in reverse (R)
or park (P) or provide any additional warning
when a turn signal is on.
Note: Cross traffic alert detects approaching
vehicles from up to 45.9 ft (14 m) away
though coverage decreases when the
sensors are blocked. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.

Driving Aids
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the cross traffic alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross traffic alert is not a replacement
for careful driving.

E142440

218

MKZ (), enUSA

Driving Aids
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is nearly

maximized.

E142441

Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.

219

MKZ (), enUSA

Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages

System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system recognizing a
blocked condition and alerting the
driver, the number of missed objects will
increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use
the BLIS as a replacement for using the side
and rear view mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS is not
a replacement for careful driving.

E142442

The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems
illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of the vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from.

Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning
with no blockage present; this is rare and
known as a false blockage warning. A false
blocked condition either self-corrects or
clears after a key cycle.

Note: The alert indicator dims when
nighttime darkness is detected.

The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow these areas
to become obstructed by mud, snow or
bumper stickers, as this can cause degraded
system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or a message warning
of low visibility will appear in the information
display and the alert indicator illuminates in
the appropriate mirror(s). The information
display warning can be cleared but the alert
indicator remains illuminated.

Cross traffic alert also sounds an audible
warning and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left. Cross traffic
alert works with the reverse sensing system
which sounds its own series of tones. See
Parking Aid (page 192).

220

MKZ (), enUSA

E142443

Driving Aids
When the blockage is removed, the system
can be reset in two ways:
• when at least two objects are detected
while driving, or
• turn the ignition from on to off, then back
on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle, the system senses again that it is
blocked after driving in traffic.

Reasons for messages being displayed

The radar Clean the fascia area in front
surface is
of the radar or remove the
dirty or
obstruction.
obstructed
The radar Drive normally in traffic for a
few minutes to allow the
surface is
radar to detect passing
not dirty or
obstructed vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
No action required. The
Heavy rainfall/snowfall system automatically resets
interferes to an unblocked state once
the rainfall or snowfall rate
with the
decreases or stops. Do not
radar
use BLIS or cross traffic alert
signals
in these conditions.

The following are other situations that may
limit the BLIS:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering
and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a convoy
pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the cross traffic alert system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts

System Limitations
The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems do
have their limitations; situations such as
severe weather conditions or debris build-up
on the sensor area may limit vehicle
detection.
221

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: If a trailer is connected to the vehicle
the BLIS system may detect the trailer
causing a false alert. You may want to turn
the BLIS off manually.

Driving Aids
There may be certain instances when either
the BLIS or cross traffic alert systems
illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle
in the coverage zone; this is known as a false
alert. Some amount of false alerts are normal;
they are temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the BLIS telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in the
information display.

Note: The CTA system always switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on.
However, the BLIS system will remember the
last selected on or off setting.
One or both systems cannot be switched off
when MyKey is used. See Principle of
Operation (page 59).
One or both systems can also be switched
off permanently at your authorized dealer.
Once switched off, switching it back on must
also be done at your authorized dealer.

All other system faults will only be displayed
by a message in the information display.
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off
temporarily by using the information display
control. See (page 107). When the BLIS is
switched off, you will not receive alerts and
a telltale illuminates in the information
display. The yellow alert indicator in the
outside mirror will also flash twice.

Electric Power Steering
WARNING
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.

222

MKZ (), enUSA

STEERING

Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.

Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.

Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).

COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT activate the
brakes automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes may result
in a collision.

223

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to
maintain distance and speed.

E156130

This system is designed to alert the driver of
certain collision risks. A radar detects if your
vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.

Driving Aids
Using the Collision Warning System

Blocked Sensors

WARNING

E156131

If it is, a red warning light illuminates and an
audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light illuminates,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. This may be apparent to
the driver. The system does not automatically
activate the brakes but, if the brake pedal is
pressed, full force braking is applied even if
the brake pedal is lightly pressed.

The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings by
using the information display control. See
(page 107).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See (page 107).

224

MKZ (), enUSA

E145632

If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the radar
signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed.

Driving Aids

Cause

Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
in the display
that it is no longer obstructed
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals

The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
with the radar signals
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.

Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These
include:
•
•
•
•

Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).

225

MKZ (), enUSA

•
•
•

Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
Small distance to vehicle ahead.
Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).

If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.

Driving Aids
DRIVE CONTROL

•

LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.

•

Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
•

Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.

Note: Active noise control is only available
with EcoBoost™ engines.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
226

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.

Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
Drive (D) or in Sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.

Driving Aids
To change your vehicle’s Drive Control
settings from the main menu on the
information display:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Choose Settings.
Choose Vehicle.
Choose Drive Control.
Select the shift position you would like
to configure, either D or S.
5. Choose from Comfort, Normal, or Sport
modes as your preferred setting in D.
6. Choose from Normal or Sport modes as
your preferred setting in S.

Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode
selections within the information display,
preventing you from changing states when
the gear position is changed. Other types of
errors will produce a temporary message
that states Drive Control Malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.

Settings in S:
• Handling in S - The suspension stiffens,
with an emphasis on handling and
control.
• Performance in S - The engine responds
more directly to your inputs and takes on
a more powerful tone.
Note: Not all settings may be available.

227

MKZ (), enUSA

Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer or both,
to keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability, with

or without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or
without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label:

Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the
vehicle including full fluids and all
standard equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of
your new vehicle when you picked it up
from your authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.

Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the
maximum payload for the vehicle as built
by the assembly plant. If you install any

aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire Label in order to determine the
new payload.

PAYLOAD

E143816

Payload - is the combined weight of
cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have a Tire

228

MKZ (), enUSA

Load Carrying
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
Example only:

E142516

229

MKZ (), enUSA

Load Carrying

E142517

CARGO

E143817

230

MKZ (), enUSA

Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
When towing, trailer tongue load or king
pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total
weight placed on each axle (front and
rear) including vehicle curb weight and
all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is
the maximum allowable weight that can
be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
These numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position. The
total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.

GVW

E143818

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the
Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus
passengers.

231

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.

Load Carrying
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door

hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position. The
Gross Vehicle Weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.

Example only:

E142523

232

MKZ (), enUSA

Load Carrying

E142524

WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification Label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.

233

MKZ (), enUSA

Load Carrying

GCW

GVW

E143819

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the
Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross

Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It
assumes a vehicle with mandatory
options, driver and front passenger
weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each),
no cargo weight (internal or external)
and a tongue load of 10–15%

234

MKZ (), enUSA

(conventional trailer) or king pin weight
of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult
an authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin
Weight - refers to the amount of the
weight that a trailer pushes down on a
trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268
kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper
tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500
pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a
proper king pin load range of 1725 to
2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms).

Load Carrying
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.

235

MKZ (), enUSA

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples
on how to calculate the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.

Load Carrying
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you

have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating specified for your vehicle on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position.

236

MKZ (), enUSA

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: There may be electrical items
such as fuses or relays that can affect
trailer towing operation. See Fuses
(page 261).

The load capacity of your vehicle is
designated by weight not volume. You
may not necessarily be able to use all
available space when loading your
vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places extra load on the
engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires,
and suspension. Inspect these
components before, during and after
towing.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects the vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items in the center
of the left and right side trailer tires.

237

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise
or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward the
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in the
Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 228).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.

Towing

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website

http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/

RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Be sure to take into consideration
trailer
frontal area.
Do not exceed 12
2
2
feet (1.11 meters ).

Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting
at the 1000 foot (300 meter) elevation
point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.

238

MKZ (), enUSA

Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided
the maximum trailer weight is less than
or equal to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle configuration on
the following chart.

Towing

Powertrain

Maximum trailer weight

2.0L GTDI

1000 lb (454 kg)

3.7L TiVCT

1000 lb (454 kg)

Calculated with SAE J2807 method.

239

MKZ (), enUSA

Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 228).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.

Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.

Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.

The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.

Trailer Lamps
WARNING

WARNING

Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.

Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.

Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.

Trailer Brakes

240

MKZ (), enUSA

Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.

Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.

•

When Towing a Trailer
•

•
•

•

Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.

•

Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:

1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)

241

MKZ (), enUSA

Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.

Towing
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.

E143886

242

MKZ (), enUSA

Towing
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS

Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.

You can flat-tow (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain/transmission
configuration) your disabled vehicle (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you tow
it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in position N.
If you cannot place the transmission in
position N, you may need to override it.
See Transmission (page 171).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).

Emergency Towing

Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 132).
243

MKZ (), enUSA

Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage the transmission during towing.
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.0L Engine
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles CANNOT
be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot tow your vehicle.

Towing
Vehicles Equipped with a 3.7L Engine
You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground using the Neutral Tow feature,
or with all four wheels off the ground using
a vehicle transport trailer. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction
specified by the equipment provider.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Neutral Tow
Enter Neutral Tow mode by doing the
following:
1. Put the ignition in accessory mode by
pressing the engine START button
without pressing the brake pedal.
2. Select Neutral Tow under the Vehicle
Settings menu in the information display.
See (page 107).
3. Press and hold the OK button to start the
neutral tow process.

4. Press the brake pedal and select N on
the push-button transmission.
5. Turn the ignition off by pressing the
engine START button without pressing
the brake pedal.
If the process is completes successfully:
• the N on the push-button transmission
blinks slowly
• Neutral Tow Engaged turn ignition off
for towing appears in the information
display.
Note: If the parking brake is applied, Neutral
Tow remove park brake for towing appears
in the information display.
Note: Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Note: Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours (or fewer). Shut the
engine off and verify that Neutral tow
engaged appears in the display before
continuing to tow.
Exit Neutral Tow mode, make sure the
ignition is on (engine can be on or off), press
the brake pedal and select P on the
push-button transmission.
244

MKZ (), enUSA

If the process is completed successfully,
Neutral Tow disengaged appears in the
information display and both the instrument
cluster and push-button transmission display
P.

Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN

•

You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.

•

Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.

•
•

Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
•

ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.

•
•

Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15% less
fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121 kph).
Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
Use the recommended engine oil.
Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.

There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.

245

MKZ (), enUSA

•
•
•
•
•

•

Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 kilometers/liter]
is lost for every 400 lbs [180 kilograms]
of weight carried).
Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.

Driving Hints
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.

•

Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.

•
•
•

Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.

E176360

When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:

Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.

246

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.

Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.

To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.

Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.

E142666

To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.

247

MKZ (), enUSA

Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

•

Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance

•

If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.

•

Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).

248

MKZ (), enUSA

Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.

Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Ford Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.

Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-9333.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered services
in Canada or the continental United States.
Coverage extends to vehicles that use public,
non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways.
Roadside Assistance coverage does not
extend to vehicles involved in cross-country
driving, logging, autocross and any other
form of off-road use. Well maintained roads
and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
Supplier, and allow their representatives to
perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to the
dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.

For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm if
you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.

The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

Call the Lincoln Roadside Assistance at
1-800-387-9333 for additional information.

•

Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance

•

Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the United States coverage.
Please refer to your warranty information or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com
for information on Canadian services and
benefits.
Canadian clients who need to obtain
roadside information, call 1-800-387-9333 or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.

249

MKZ (), enUSA

Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again to turn them off.

FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.

Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to start the vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable with
insulated clamps.

250

MKZ (), enUSA

Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch. Turn all accessories
off.

Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the Jumper Cables

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground connection
point if available.

WARNING

WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.

Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.

Jump Starting
E142664

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.

251

MKZ (), enUSA

1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.

2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.

Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.

After the disabled vehicle has been started
and the jumper cables removed, allow it to
idle for several minutes so the battery can
recharge.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
3
E142665

1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface or connecting
point, if available.

252

MKZ (), enUSA

The system flashes the turn signal lamps and
sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event
of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
(front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or
the safety belt pretensioners.

Roadside Emergencies
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• The hazard control button is pressed
• The panic button (if equipped) is pressed
on the remote entry transmitter
• Your vehicle runs out of power

Spinout Detection
If a spinout is detected, the vehicle comes
to a stop and the hazard warning flashers
come on. The message Spinout Detected
Hazards Activated will also appear on the
instrument cluster. The message may not
appear if your vehicle runs out of power.
Once the hazard warning flashers have been
activated, you can turn them off by:
• Pressing the hazard warning flasher
button
• Pressing the remote control unlock
button
• Pressing the remote control panic button
• Cycling the ignition on and off twice

253

MKZ (), enUSA

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.

Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone

These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address

1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)

Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

Online

Telephone

Additional information and resources are
available online at www.lincolnowner.com

1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA

254

MKZ (), enUSA

Customer Assistance
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies, please
contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center.

In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford
in writing before pursuing remedies under
your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
255

MKZ (), enUSA

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR

Customer Assistance
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.

may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.

THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.

Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you

256

MKZ (), enUSA

BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try

Customer Assistance
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.

UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.

257

MKZ (), enUSA

In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.

Customer Assistance
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:

258

MKZ (), enUSA

FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:

Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.

If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE

www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)

To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

259

MKZ (), enUSA

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:

E142557

Customer Assistance
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
Transport Canada Contact Information

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm

Phone

1–800–333–0510

260

MKZ (), enUSA

1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada.

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.

WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.

261

MKZ (), enUSA

The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect your vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you will need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 294).

Fuses

E190797

262

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Wide open panoramic roof 1.

30A
-

Starter relay.
Rain sensor.

15A
-

Blower motor relay.
Power point 3 - Back of console.

20A
-

Not used.
1

Powertrain control module - vehicle power 1.

Powertrain control module - vehicle power 2.

20A
20A
-

Powertrain control module relay.
3

Power point 1 - driver front.

Powertrain control module - vehicle power 4.

Powertrain control module - vehicle power 3.

20A
15A
15A

263

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

13
14
15
16

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Powertrain control module - vehicle power 5.

Powertrain control module - vehicle power 6.

10A
10A
-

Run-start relay.
Power point 2 - console.

20A

Not used.

19
20
21
22
23

Run-start electronic power assist steering.

Run-start lighting.

Run-start transmission control.
Transmission oil pump start-stop.

Air conditioner clutch solenoid.

10A
10A
15A

10A

Run-start: blind spot information system, rear view camera,
adaptive cruise control, heads-up display, shifter.
Voltage stability module.

15A
-

Not used.

264

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

25
26

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Run-start anti-lock brake system.

Run-start powertrain control module.

10A
10A

Not used.

Mass air flow monitor.

Not used.

Electronic fan #1 relay.

Air conditioner clutch relay.

Not used.

Electronic fan 2 relay.

Electronic fan coil 2 and 3 relay.

265

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

Horn relay.

Not used.

Fuel pump relay coil.

Not used.

–

Not used.

–

Not used.

–

Not used.

49
50

Protected components

Keep-alive power.

Horn.

10A

20A

Not used.

Power seats.

10A

266

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

54
55
1

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Brake on-off switch.

Alt sensor.

10A
10A

Micro fuse.

2
3

Dual micro fuse.

M-type fuse.

Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses located on the bottom of the
fuse box. To access the bottom of the fuse
box, do the following:

267

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
1. Release the two latches, located on both
sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center of
the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.

E145983

268

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses

E190798

269

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

–

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

Protected components

Not used.
1

Diesel vaporizer or E100.

Fuel pump feed.

Electronic fan 3.

Electronic fan 1.

20A
30A
30A
30A
-

Not used.
2

Body control module 1.

Electronic fan 2.

50A

20A
-

Not used.
Front heated seat.

20A
-

Not used.
Body control module 2.

50A

270

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Heated rear window.

Anti-lock brake system valves.

Passenger seat.

40A
30A
30A
-

Not used.
1

Transmission oil pump.

Rear climate controlled seats.

Driver seat module.

Wiper motor 1.

Power lift gate module.

Front climate controlled seats.

Trailer tow module.

Blower motor.

20A
20A
30A

25A
30A
30A

40A
40A

271

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
1

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Wiper motor 2.

Inverter.

25A
40A
–

Not used.
1

TRCM shifter.

Starter solenoid.

Wide open panoramic roof 2.

20A
30A
30A
-

Not used.
Anti-lock brake system pump.

60A

M-type fuse.

J-type fuse.

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column.

272

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses

E145984

273

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome, trunk).

Memory seats, Lumbar, Power mirror.

Driver door unlock.

10A

7.5A
20A

Not used (spare).

Subwoofer amplifier.

20A

Heated seat relay coil.

Not used (spare).

10A
10A
10A
10A

Power trunk logic.
Keypad.
Cellphone passport module.

274

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

11
12
13

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Not used (spare).

Climate control, Gear shift.

Steering wheel column.
Cluster.
Datalink logic.

7.5A
7.5A

Battery electronic control module.

Datalink-Gateway module.

Trunk release.
Child lock.

10A
10A

15A

Tracking and blocking.

Ignition.
Push button stop-start.

5A
5A

Passenger-airbag-disabled indicator.
Transmission range.

Adaptive headlamps.

7.5A
7.5A

275

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

Humidity and in-car temperature sensor.

Occupant classification sensor.

5A
5A

Delayed accessory (power inverter, smart window, driverwindow switch).

Central lock-unlock.

Driver door (window, mirror).

Front passenger door (window, mirror).

Moonroof.

Amplifier.

Rear driver side door (window).

Rear passenger side door (window).

Not used (spare).

10A

20A
30A
30A
30A

20A
30A
30A
15A

276

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
Fuse or relay number

34
35
36

37
38
1

Fuse amp rating

Protected components

GPS.
Voice control.
Adaptive cruise control.
Radio frequency receiver.
Display.

10A

Radio.
Active noise control.
CD changer.

20A

Run-start bus (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker).

30A

Restraints control module.

Continuous control damping suspension module.
Auto dimming rear view mirror.
Rear heated seats.

15A

Heated steering wheel.
All wheel drive.

30A

Not used (spare).

15A

Micro fuse.

Dual micro fuse.

277

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with one
that has the specified amperage rating.
If you use a fuse with a higher amperage
rating, you may cause severe wire damage
and may start a fire.

E142430

A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a failed
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.

278

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide
scheduled maintenance information which
makes tracking routine service easy. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 487).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.

Precautions
•
•
•

•

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD

Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
279

MKZ (), enUSA

1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels

E142457

1. To open the hood, go inside the vehicle
and pull the hood release handle located
under the left-hand side of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary release lever, which is located
under the front of the hood, near the
Lincoln badge.

Maintenance
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left,
toward the passenger side of the vehicle.
4. Raise the hood. A gas strut will support
the hood.

5. To close the hood, lower the hood and
apply closing force to the hood as it
drops the last 8 to 11 inches (20 to 30
centimeters).

280

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Make sure that the hood is closed fully
before operating your vehicle. A warning
indicator will appear in the information
display if not closed properly.

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™

E179024

Engine coolant reservoir cap.

Engine oil dipstick.

281

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
C

Engine oil filler cap.

Brake fluid reservoir cap.

Battery.

Power distribution box.

Engine air filter assembly.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap.

282

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L

E153064

Engine coolant reservoir cap

Engine oil filler cap

283

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
C

Brake fluid reservoir cap

Battery

Power distribution box

Air filter housing

Transmission fluid dipstick

Engine oil dipstick

Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap

284

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.7L

1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil
immediately.

Adding Engine Oil
E146429
E142462

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.

ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.

285

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use
a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.

OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 355).

To reset the oil monitoring system after an
oil change, See (page 107).

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on
hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.

286

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure. steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.

Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 487).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.

Maintenance
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such
as Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.

Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded, nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the engine
coolant to be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system
components and may void the warranty. Use
prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 355).
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System
Flush.

287

MKZ (), enUSA

3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 355).

Maintenance
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level
to the proper level.

Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.

Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point protection.
Engine coolant concentrations above
60% will decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.

288

MKZ (), enUSA

What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this
feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The fail-safe distance
depends on outside temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
A high engine temperature
message will appear in the
information display.
The service engine soon indicator
will light.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine will
automatically switch to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.

Maintenance
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine
temperature and the engine will completely
shut down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain

WARNINGS
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK

You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.

6F35/HF35 transmission (If Equipped)

Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:

The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.

1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.

289

MKZ (), enUSA

5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.

Maintenance
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.

6F50/6F55 Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The dipstick cap and surrounding
components may be hot; gloves are
recommended.
Use gloves when moving the air filter
assembly. Components will be hot.
Note: Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 kilometers]). If
your vehicle has been operated for an
extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the
vehicle should be turned off until normal
operating temperatures are reached to allow
the fluid to cool before checking. Depending
on vehicle use, cooling times could take up
to 30 minutes or longer.

Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly. For example, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 kilometers)
or until it reaches normal operating
temperature
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your
foot on the brake pedal, start the engine
and move the gearshift lever through all
of the gear ranges. Allow a minimum of
10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park) and
leave the engine running.
Note: You will need to move the air filter
assembly to access the transmission
dipstick.

290

MKZ (), enUSA

5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with
a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary,
refer to Under hood overview in this
chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully
seated in the filler tube by turning it to
the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid
level. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal operating
temperature.
Moving the Air Filter Assembly (Accessing
the Dipstick)
WARNING
Do not run engine with the air filter
disconnected.

Maintenance

E158839

1. Shut the engine off.
2. Clean the area around the clamp that
connects the air filter assembly to the
rubber hose (A).

E158840

E158841

3. Remove the bolt cover (if equipped).
4. Remove two bolts that attach the air filter
assembly to the front of the vehicle (B).
5. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose (A).
6. Remove the harness retaining clip by
pulling up (C). Do not disconnect the
sensor (D).
7. Without disconnecting the sensor (D), pull
the air filter assembly up to disconnect
the air filter assembly from the seated
grommets located underneath the air
filter assembly.

8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees
counterclockwise and reinstall into the
rubber hose.
9. Tighten the clamp (A).
10. The transmission fluid level indicator
can now be accessed.

291

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
Checking the fluid level

Correct fluid level

High fluid level

E158843

E158844

The transmission fluid should be checked at
normal operating temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after
approximately 20 miles (30 kilometers) of
driving.

If the fluid level is above the MAX range of
the dipstick, remove fluid to reach the
hashmark level.

Low fluid level

E158842

If the fluid level is below the MIN range of
the dipstick, add fluid to reach the hash mark
level.
Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN level,
do not drive the vehicle. An underfill
condition may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage.

The transmission fluid level should be
targeted within the cross-hatch area if at
normal operating temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C).

292

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Fluid level above the MAX level may
cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage. High fluid levels can be
caused by an overheating condition. If your
vehicle has been operated for an extended
period at high speeds, in city traffic during
hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle
should be turned off until normal operating
temperatures are reached. Depending on
vehicle use, cooling times could take up to
30 minutes or longer.

Maintenance
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid
Levels

E158845

E158846

Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid used
is normally indicated on the dipstick and also
in the Technical Specifications section in this
chapter.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage.

Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
Reinstall the air filter assembly. After the fluid
level has been checked and adjusted as
necessary, do the following:
1. Shut the engine off.
2. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
3. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees
clockwise without disconnecting the
sensor.
4. Seat the air filter assembly back into the
grommets by pushing down on the air
filter assembly.
5. Tighten the clamp.
6. Install and tighten two bolts that attach
air filter assembly to the front of the
vehicle.
7. Install the bolt cover (if equipped).
8. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into
the front of the air filter assembly.

293

MKZ (), enUSA

BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines
are within the normal operating range; there
is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the
performance of the system could be
compromised; seek service from your
authorized dealer immediately.

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.

WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.

Maintenance
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 355).

WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide proper ventilation.

State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

FUEL FILTER

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.

Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during its
life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover or shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.

294

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

Maintenance
When a low voltage battery replacement is
necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow a
technician to connect any electrical device
ground connection directly to the low voltage
battery negative post. A connection at the
low voltage battery negative post can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic
accessories or components to the vehicle,
the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make
certain the battery cables are always tightly
fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required, the
battery should only be replaced with a Ford
recommended replacement battery that
matches the electrical requirements of the
vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the low voltage battery. Some
engine computer settings, like the idle trim
and fuel trim strategy, optimize the
driveability and performance of the engine.
Some other computer settings, like the clock
and radio station presets, are also maintained
in memory by power from the low voltage
battery. When a technician disconnects and
connects the low voltage battery, these
settings are erased.

295

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
Complete the following procedure in order
to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into P.
3. Turn off all accessories.
4. Step on the brake pedal and start the
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 372). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 93). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 372).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, step on
the accelerator to start the engine.

Maintenance
7. While the engine is running, step on the
brake pedal and shift the transmission to
N.
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive your vehicle at least 10 miles (16
kilometers) to completely relearn the idle
and fuel trim strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the Battery Monitor System is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.

Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal.
Call your local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling automotive
batteries.

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

Note: It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected from
the battery if you plan to store your vehicle
for an extended period of time.

1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass.

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
1

E129990

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.

296

MKZ (), enUSA

The wiper arms can be manually moved
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.

2. Press the locking buttons together.
3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.

Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when the ignition is turned on.

Headlamp Aiming Target

Replace wiper blades at least once per year
for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.

E142592

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

8 feet (2.4 meters)

Vertical Aim Adjustment

Center height of lamp to ground

The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, the alignment of
your headlamps should be checked by your
authorized dealer.

25 feet (7.6 meters)

Horizontal reference line

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.

297

MKZ (), enUSA

2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8
foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.

E142465

Maintenance
4. On the wall or screen you will observe a
flat zone of high intensity light located at
the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will need
to be adjusted.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is not adjustable.

CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation

E150095

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate
normal changes in pressure. Condensation
can be a natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp assembly
through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the
temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can
form on the interior of the lens. The thin mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation. Clearing time may
take as long as 48 hours under dry weather
conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
298

MKZ (), enUSA

Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually
caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of unacceptable
moisture are present.

Replacing Bulbs
For replacing bulbs, see your authorized
dealer.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with
an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to
make sure they have the proper lamp
performance, light brightness, light pattern,
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not
damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality
bulb illumination time.

Maintenance

Function

Trade name

Headlamp high beam

LED

Headlamp low beam

LED

Side marker lamp - front

LED

Park lamp - front

LED

Turn lamp - front

LED

Tail and brake lamp - high series

LED

Tail and brake lamp - low series

LED

Reverse lamp

LED

Turn lamp - rear - high series

LED

Turn lamp - rear - low series

LED

Side marker lamp - rear

LED

License plate lamp

LED

Trunk lamp

LED

High-mount brake lamp

LED

Side repeater lamp

LED

299

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
Function

Trade name

Glove compartment lamp

LED

Interior lamp

LED

To replace any bulb, see your authorized dealer.

300

MKZ (), enUSA

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.

2.0L EcoBoost Engine

When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 355).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.

E146427

1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.

E144365

Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
487).

301

MKZ (), enUSA

3.7L Engine

Maintenance
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clamps to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.

302

MKZ (), enUSA

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION

•

Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.

•

CLEANING PRODUCTS

•

For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
• Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
• Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
• Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
• Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
• Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
• Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)

•
•
•
•

Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,
B, D or F)]
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.

303

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.

Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

•

Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes and
graphics. This can damage them and cause
the edges to peel away from the vehicle
surface.

•

Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.

•

Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.

WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.

304

MKZ (), enUSA

•

•
•

Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.

Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE ENGINE

•

Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.

•

When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.

Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

305

MKZ (), enUSA

To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.

Vehicle Care
WARNINGS
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
309).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.

Cleaning Black Label Interior (If
Equipped)

For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.

Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.

306

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.

Note: Lincoln Black Label vehicles may have
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric on the
seats, headliner, floor mats and door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:

Vehicle Care

Type of Stain

Cleaning Procedure

Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.

Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.

Blood, egg, excrement or urine.

Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.

Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.

Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.

Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.
cream or mustard.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.

Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.

Dye transfer and all other stains.

Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.

307

MKZ (), enUSA

Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS

•

WARNING

•

Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.

•

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
309).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.

308

MKZ (), enUSA

2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

Vehicle Care
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.

Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE

Note: Do not use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56 on Lincoln
Black Label, Presidential or Reserve
Leathers because it can damage those and
other semi-aniline leather seating fabrics. It
can also damage surround microfiber accent
surfaces. To clean Lincoln Black Label,
Presidential or Reserve Leathers, first
vacuum the seats to remove loose dirt. Then
wipe the leather with a clean soft cloth
dampened with lukewarm water and a mild
soap. Wiper the leather again with a slightly
damp cloth to remove soap residue, and dry
with a soft cloth. To maintain the leather's
resiliency, it should be cleaned whenever
soiled.

Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.

309

MKZ (), enUSA

Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.

Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.

CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.

Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
•

•

Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.

•

Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.

General
•
•
•

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.

Body
•

•
•
•

•

310

MKZ (), enUSA

Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.

Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.

Vehicle Care
•
•

Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.

Cooling system

Miscellaneous

•
•

•

Engine
•

•

•
•

Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.

Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.

Battery

Removing Vehicle From Storage

•

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.

•

Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.

Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.

Fuel system

Brakes

•

Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.

Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.

Tires
•

Maintain recommended air pressure.
311

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.

Vehicle Care
•

•

Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.

312

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (If Equipped)
Type 1
Note: The temporary mobility kit canister
contains enough sealant compound for one
tire repair only. See your authorized Ford
dealer for additional replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located under the load floor of the
trunk. The kit consists of an air compressor
to inflate the tire and a sealing compound in
a canister that will effectively seal most
punctures caused by nails or similar objects.
This kit will provide a temporary tire repair
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
120 mi (200 km) at a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) to reach a tire service
location.

Air pressure gauge

Sealant bottle and canister

Sealant filling clear tube

Sealant tube - tire valve connector

Yellow cap tool

Air compressor hose

Air hose -tire valve connector

Accessory power plug

Casing/housing

General Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
E144618

Air compressor (inside)

Diverter knob

On and off button

313

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become
severely damaged by driving the vehicle with
a tire that has insufficient air pressure. Only
punctured areas located within the tire tread
can be sealed with the kit.

Wheels and Tires
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than 0.24 in (6 mm) or damage to the tire's
sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.

•
•

Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire
performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest authorized
Ford dealer or tire repair shop to have your
tire inspected.
•
•

•

Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure
in the affected tire. If the tire is losing
pressure, have the vehicle towed.
Read the information in the Tips for Use
of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.

Tips for Use of the Kit

•
•
•

•

•
•

To ensure safe operation of the kit:
•

Read all instructions and cautions fully.
Before operating the kit, make sure your
vehicle is safely off the road and away
from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard
lights.
Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle does not move unexpectedly.
Do not remove any foreign objects, such
as nails or screws, from the tire.
When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors or
in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the vehicle
battery.
Do not allow the compressor to operate
continuously for more than 15 minutes.
This will help prevent the compressor
from overheating.
Never leave the kit unattended when it
is operating.
Sealant compound contains latex. Make
sure that you use the non-latex gloves
provided to avoid an allergic reaction.
Keep the kit away from children.

314

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C) and
158°F (70°C).
Only use the sealing compound before
the use by date. The use by date is on
the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister (bottle).
Check the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years.
Do not store the kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle
as it may cause injury during a sudden
stop or crash. Always store the kit in its
original location.
After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
When inflating a tire or other objects, use
the black air hose only. Do not use the
transparent hose which is designed for
sealant application only.
Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.

Wheels and Tires
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire tread area can
be repaired in two stages with the kit.
•

•

In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated
with a sealing compound and air. After
the tire has been reinflated, you will need
to drive the vehicle a short distance 4 mi
(6 km) to distribute the sealant in the tire.
In the second stage, you will need to
check the tire pressure and adjust, if
necessary, to the vehicle tire inflation
pressure.

Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid
any allergic reactions, use the non-latex
gloves located in the accessory box on the
underside of the kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the
metal connector of the tube to the tire
valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the
connection is tightly fastened.

If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within 15
minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.

315

MKZ (), enUSA

E144619

4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the
canister and place it on the top of the
instrument panel or the center of the
dash.
6. Start the vehicle only if the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.

Wheels and Tires

E144924

7. Push and turn dial (A) counterclockwise
to the sealant position. Turn on the kit by
pressing the on/off button (B).

E144621

8. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified
by the tire label located on the driver
door or the door jamb area. While the
sealant compound is being pumped into
the tire, the air pressure gauge will
indicate a pressure above the actual tire
pressure. This is normal and should be
no reason for concern. The pressure
gauge will provide a correct tire pressure
reading after about 30 seconds of
operation. The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the off
position to get an accurate tire pressure
reading.
9. When the recommended tire pressure is
reached, turn off the kit by pressing the
on/off button. Disconnect the kit from the
tire valve and the power point. Re-install
the valve cap on the tire valve, place the
tube cap on the metal connector, and
return the kit to the stowage area
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside the
tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

11.

After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.

Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
stage: Re–inflating the tire with sealing
compound and air section and have injected
sealant in the tire and the pressure is below
20 psi (1.4 bar), stop and call roadside
assistance. If tire pressure is above 20 psi
(1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
The power plug may get hot after use
and should be handled carefully while
unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:

316

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the side of
the compressor and fasten firmly on the
valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on button.

E144622

4. Adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure from the tire label
located on the driver door or door jamb
area. The tire pressure has to be checked
with the compressor in the OFF position
to get the correct tire pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by pressing the
on/off button.

6. When the tire pressure reading with the
compressor in the off position is correct,
disconnect the hose, re-install the valve
cap on the tire valve, unplug the
compressor, and return the kit to the
stowage area.

What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister and
clear tube (hose). You can obtain and replace
sealing compound and spare parts at an
authorized Ford dealer or tire dealer. Empty
sealant bottles may be disposed of at home.
However, liquid residue from the sealing
compound should be disposed by your local
Ford Motor Company dealer or tire dealer,
or in accordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has been
used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance
is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire should
be inspected immediately.

317

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing the
procedure from Second stage: Checking tire
pressure listed previously.
Removal of the sealant canister from the
kit

E144623

1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.

Wheels and Tires
Installation of the sealant canister to the
kit

2. Once aligned, seat the sealant canister
by lightly pushing down until you hear an
audible click.

E144624

2. Locate the yellow cap at the end of the
clear tube.

E144626
E144628

1. Align the sealant canister with the kit
housing.

E144625

3. Using the yellow cap tool, press the tab
located on the kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant canister.
E161567

318

MKZ (), enUSA

3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult your Ford Motor Company
authorized dealer for assistance.

Wheels and Tires

E144629

Be sure to check the sealant compound's
use by date regularly. The use by date is on
the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister (bottle). The
sealant canister should be replaced after four
years of non-use.

The kit is located under the load floor in the
trunk. The kit consists of an air compressor
to re-inflate the tire and a canister of sealing
compound that will effectively seal most
punctures caused by nails or similar objects.
This kit will provide a temporary tire repair
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120
(200 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) to reach a tire service location.

Type 2
Note: The temporary mobility kit contains
enough sealant compound in the canister
for one tire repair only. See your authorized
Ford dealer for replacement sealant
canisters.

E175977

319

MKZ (), enUSA

Air compressor (inside)

Selector switch

On and off button

Wheels and Tires
D

Air pressure gauge

Sealant bottle and canister

Dual purpose hose: air and repair

Tire valve connector

Accessory power plug

Casing/housing

Bike/raft/sports ball adapters

General Information

Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire
performance. For this reason:

•

Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph
(80 km/h).

•

Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest authorized
Ford dealer or tire repair shop to have your
tire inspected.

•

•
•

WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become
severely damaged. Only punctures located
within the tire tread can be sealed with the
kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to the
tire's sidewall. The tire may not completely
seal.

•

Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure
in the affected tire; if the tire is losing
pressure, have the vehicle towed.
Read the information in the Tips for Use
of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.

•
•

Tips for Use of the Kit
To ensure safe operation of the kit:
•
•

Read all instructions and cautions fully.
Before operating the kit, make sure your
vehicle is safely off the road and away
from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard
lights.

320

MKZ (), enUSA

•

•
•

Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle doesn't move unexpectedly.
Do not remove any foreign objects, such
as nails or screws, from the tire.
When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors or
in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the vehicle's
battery.
Do not allow the compressor to operate
continuously for more than 15 minutes.
This will help prevent the compressor
from overheating.
Never leave the kit unattended during
operation.
Sealant compound contains latex. Those
with latex sensitivities should use
appropriate precautions to avoid an
allergic reaction.
Keep the kit away from children.
Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C) and
158°F (70°C).

Wheels and Tires
•

•

Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on a
label on the sealant canister and can be
seen through the rectangular viewing
window on the bottom of the compressor.
Check the use-by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years of
non-use.
Do not store the kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle
as it may cause injury during a sudden
stop or crash. Always store the kit in its
original location.
After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.

E175978

* When inflation only is required for
a tire or other objects, the selector
must be in the Air position.

What to do when a Tire Is Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire's tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit.
•

•

In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated
with a sealing compound and air. After
the tire has been inflated, you will need
to drive the vehicle a short distance
(about 4 miles [6 kilometers]) to distribute
the sealant in the tire.
In the second stage, you will need to
check the tire pressure and adjust, if
necessary, to the vehicle's specified tire
inflation pressure.

First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit while
inflating the tire. If you notice any
unusual bulges or deformations in the tire's
sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within 15
minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.

321

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
Do not run the engine during kit
operation unless the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. Use
appropriate precautions to avoid any allergic
reactions.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise. Tighten
the connection securely.

Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the
casing/housing and place it on the top of
the instrument panel or the center of the
dash.
6. Start the vehicle leave the engine running
so the compressor does not drain the
vehicle’s battery.

E175981

E175979

4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.

7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant
position. Turn the kit on by pressing the
on/off button (B).

322

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on
the tire label located on the driver's door
or the door jamb area. The initial air
pressure gauge reading may indicate a
value higher than the label pressure
while the sealing compound is being
pumped into the tire. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. The
pressure gauge reading will indicate the
tire inflation pressure after about 30
seconds of operation. The final tire
pressure should be checked with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.

9. When the recommended tire pressure is
reached, turn off the kit, unplug the
power cable, and disconnect the hose
from the tire valve. Re-install the valve
cap on the tire valve and return the kit to
the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside the
tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
E175982

323

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
Stage: Re-inflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air section and have injected
sealant in the tire and the pressure is below
20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
The power plug may get hot after use
and should be handled carefully while
unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:

2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position.
4. If required, turn on the compressor and
adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure shown on the tire label
located on the driver's door or door jamb
area. The tire pressure should be
checked with the compressor turned OFF
in order to get an accurate pressure
reading.
5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap
on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.

What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister. Sealant
canisters and spare parts can be obtained
at an authorized Ford dealer. Empty sealant
canisters may be disposed of at home.
However, canisters still containing liquid
sealant should be disposed of by your local
authorized Ford dealer or tire dealer, or in
accordance with local waste disposal
regulation.
Note: After the sealing compound has been
used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance
is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire should
be inspected immediately.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing the
steps listed previously in the Second stage:
Checking Tire Pressure procedure.

E175983

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.

324

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
Removal of the sealant canister from the
kit

2. Unwrap the power cord.

4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90
degrees and pull away from
casing/housing to remove.
Installation of the sealant canister to the
kit
1. With the canister held perpendicular to
the housing, insert the canister nozzle
into the connector and push until seated.
2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down into
the housing/casing.

E175986
E175984

3. Remove the back cover.

1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the compressor housing.

E175988

3. Snap the back cover back into place.

E175987

E175985

325

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
5. Wrap the power cord around the housing
and stow the accessory power plug into
its storage area.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult your authorized Ford dealer
for assistance.

E175989

4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black tube)
around the channel on the bottom of the
housing/casing.

Be sure to check the sealant compound’s
use-by date regularly. The use-by date is on
a label located on the sealant canister and
can be seen through the rectangular viewing
window on the bottom of the kit. The sealant
canister should be replaced after four years
of non-use.

TIRE CARE

E175990

Important information for 245/40R19
low-profile tires and wheels If your
vehicle is equipped with 245/40R19
tires, they are low-profile tires. These
tires and wheels are designed to give
your vehicle a sport appearance. With
low-profile tires, you may notice an
increase in road noise and faster tire
wear, depending on road conditions and

326

MKZ (), enUSA

driving styles. Due to their design,
low-profile tires and wheels are more
prone to road damage from potholes,
rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails
and curb contact than standard tires and
wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does not
cover these types of damage. Tires
should always be kept at the correct
inflation pressures and extra caution
should be taken when operating on
rough roads to avoid impacts that could
cause wheel and tire damage.
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading

E142542

Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1 ½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.

327

MKZ (), enUSA

The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause

Wheels and Tires
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

•

Glossary of Tire Terminology
•

•

Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and
the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
Tire Identification Number: A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire
size and date of manufacture. Also
referred to as DOT code.
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.

•
•
•

Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 (2.5 bar) depending
on tire size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
Extra load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9
bar). Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour
or more and prior to the vehicle
being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).

328

MKZ (), enUSA

•

•
•
•
•
•

Recommended inflation pressure:
The cold inflation pressure found on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
B-pillar: The structural member at
the side of the vehicle behind the
front door
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area between
the bead area and the tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.

Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.

Information on P Type Tires

C D

G
H

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)

329

MKZ (), enUSA

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.

Wheels and Tires
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186
mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed
in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.

Letter rating

mph ( km/h)

81 mph (130 km/h)

87 mph (140 km/h)

99 mph (159 km/h)

106 mph (171 km/h)

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

124 mph (200 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

330

MKZ (), enUSA

Letter rating

mph ( km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number:
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four

Wheels and Tires
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.

K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:

•

331

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Treadwear The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and
C. The grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability
to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.

Wheels and Tires
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.

Information on T Type Tires

D
E142544

LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.

332

MKZ (), enUSA

C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single; defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.

T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.

Wheels and Tires

B
A

D
E

E142545

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:

A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.

333

MKZ (), enUSA

Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.

Wheels and Tires
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
334

MKZ (), enUSA

that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.

Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example driven
more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never
bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure
the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke
a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.

335

MKZ (), enUSA

7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.

Wheels and Tires
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear

When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires
must be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear
bars, which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to one sixteenth of an inch
(2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage

E142546

Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.

336

MKZ (), enUSA

Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.

Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

Tire Replacement Requirements

Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.

Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
337

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding
tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20
psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire
service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly

Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.

338

MKZ (), enUSA

Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires; spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the
road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking

Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards

Tire and Wheel Alignment

Tire Rotation

No matter how carefully you drive there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel
and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel (if provided). If you cannot detect
a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to
have the vehicle inspected.

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re driving, the
wheels may be out of alignment. Have
an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
it is intended for temporary use only and
should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.

339

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel drive
vehicles (front tires on the left side of
the diagram)

E142547

All vehicles with directional tires (front
tires on the left of the diagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.

USING SNOW CHAINS

Summer Tires

WARNINGS
If you choose to install snow tires on
your vehicle, they must be the same
size, construction, and load range as the
original tires listed on the tire placard, and
they must be installed on all four wheels.
Mixing tires of different size or construction
on your vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may lead
to loss of vehicle control.

Your Ford vehicle may be equipped with
summer tires to provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, Ford does
not recommend using summer tires
when temperatures drop to
approximately 40°F (5°C) or below
(depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow
and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer
tire performance is affected by tire wear
and environmental conditions. If you
must drive in those conditions, Ford
recommends using Mud and Snow (M+S,
M/S), All-season or Snow tires.

E147237

340

MKZ (), enUSA

Do not use snow chains or cables on
this vehicle as they may cause damage
to your vehicle which may lead to loss of
vehicle control.
Snow chains have not been approved for
use on your vehicle.
The original equipment tires on your vehicle
may have an all-weather tread design to
provide traction, handling, and braking
performance in year-round driving. You may
install snow tires for improved traction when
driving in areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions.

Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this
chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

341

MKZ (), enUSA

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.

Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.

Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.

E142549

To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.

342

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your

tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:

343

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires

Low tire pressure warning light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Solid warning light

Tire(s) under-inflated

Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Spare tire in use

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Flashing warning light

344

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended

inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low
tire pressure warning light is on, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If
one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.

345

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 341).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 341).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have an authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.

Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.

•
•
•

When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel

•
•

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.

•
•
•
•
•

Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
Tow a trailer.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
Use commercial car washing equipment.
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
346

MKZ (), enUSA

Winter weather driving capability.
Wet weather driving capability.
All-wheel driving capability (if applicable).

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.

Wheels and Tires
•
•

Wet weather driving capability.
All-wheel driving capability

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change Procedure (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack, even if the transmission is in park
(P).

WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P), set
the parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle)
to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If your vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.

Type 1
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, place the
transmission in reverse (R) after the
engine is turned off.

Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.

347

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

E175447

3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the flat tire. For
example, if the left front tire is flat, block
the right rear wheel.

Wheels and Tires
4. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
5. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire
compartment.
E145908

E142550

7. Remove the lug wrench and jack from
the foam holder.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.

9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and can be identified by the triangle
markings on the molding. The triangle
marking may be located on the side or
the underside of the molding. The jacking
points are identified on vehicles without
moldings by a pair of arrows on the metal
flange pointing to the jacking point
between them. Details are depicted on
the warning label on the jack.

E174775

10.

348

MKZ (), enUSA

Place the jack at the jacking point next
to the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.

Wheels and Tires
11.
12.

13.

Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered. If you are using the
temporary tire, the lug nut washers will
not appear to be flush with the rim. This
is normal only when using the
temporary spare tire.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, place the
transmission in reverse (R) after the
engine is turned off.

1
4

5
E75442

14.
15.

16.

Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown.
Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Make sure the jack is fastened
securely before you drive.
Unblock the wheel.

Type 2
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.

349

MKZ (), enUSA

E175447

3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the flat tire. For
example, if the left front tire is flat, block
the right rear wheel.
4. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
5. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire
compartment.

Wheels and Tires
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and can be identified by the triangle
markings on the molding. The triangle
marking may be located on the side or
the underside of the molding. The jacking
points are identified on vehicles without
moldings by a pair of arrows on the metal
flange pointing to the jacking point
between them. Details are depicted on
the warning label on the jack.
E178186

7. Remove the lug wrench and jack from
the spare tire compartment.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.

E174775

10.
E145908

350

MKZ (), enUSA

Place the jack at the jacking point next
to the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.

Wheels and Tires
11.
12.

13.

1
4

5
E75442

14.
15.

16.

Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown.
Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Make sure the jack is fastened
securely before you drive.
Unblock the wheel.

E146026

Stowing the flat tire (Type 2)

Stowing the flat tire (Type 1)

You can stow the full-size road wheel in the
spare tire compartment.

1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an angle
to access the spare tire compartment.

1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an angle
to access the spare tire compartment.
351

MKZ (), enUSA

2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down. Use the
mini-spare bolt to secure the wheel
through one of the lug holes.
3. Place the jack, tools and foam block back
into the spare tire compartment.
4. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.

Wheels and Tires
2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down. Use the
mini-spare bolt to secure the wheel
through one of the lug holes.
3. Place the jack and tools back into the
spare tire compartment.
4. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.

E178187

352

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of control.
*

Bolt size

Ib-ft (Nm)

M12 x 1.5

100 (135)

Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).

353

MKZ (), enUSA

Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.

354

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine

2.0L EcoBoost engine

3.7L V6 Engine

Cubic inches

122

227

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Compression ratio

9.3:1

10.5:1

Spark plug gap

0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)

0.049-0.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm)

Drivebelt Routing
3.7L Engine

E146428

355

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
2.0L EcoBoost Engine

Long drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine

Short drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine

E142480

MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Component

2.0L EcoBoost Engine

Air filter element
Oil filter

FA-1912
FL-910-S

FL-500-S

Battery
Spark plugs

BXT-96R-590
SP-537

SP-520

Cabin air filter

FP-71

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2200 (driver side)

356

MKZ (), enUSA

3.7L V6 Engine

Capacities and Specifications
Component

2.0L EcoBoost Engine

3.7L V6 Engine

WW-1900 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Lincoln dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 487).

357

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.

E142477

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:

World manufacturer identifier

Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations

Make, vehicle line, series, body
type

Engine type

Check digit

Model year

Assembly plant

Production sequence number

358

MKZ (), enUSA

E167469

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.

Capacities and Specifications
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along
with the transmission description.

TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION

E167814

Description

Code

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F50

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35

359

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil

5.7 qt (5.4 L)

Engine coolant

8.9 qt (8.4 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive)

2.4 pt (1.15L)
15.2 fl oz (450 ml)

Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive)
Automatic transmission fluid

9.0 qt (8.5 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive)

16.5 gal (62.5 L)

Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive)

17.5 gal (66.2 L)

360

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C refrigerant

20 oz (0.56 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil

5.2 fl oz (155 ml)

Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling.

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-A

Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-A

Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil

WSS-M2C946-A

361

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

XO-5W30-QFS
Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M2C946-A

Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20

WSS-M6C65-A2

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL

WSP-M2C197-A

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L

WSP-M2C197-A

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant

WSP-M2C197-A

362

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

MXY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-A

Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L

WSL-M2C192-A

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant

WSH-M17B19-A

363

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

YN-19
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant

364

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.

Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.

365

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.

Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil

6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant

9.7 qt (9.2 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive)

2.4 pt (1.15L)
18.0 fl oz (532 ml)

Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive)

11.6 qt (11 L)

Automatic transmission fluid
Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel tank

17.5 gal (66.2 L)

366

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C refrigerant

24.0 oz (0.68 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil

5.2 fl oz (155 ml)

Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling.

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M2C945-A

Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12

WSS-M2C945-A

Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M2C945-A

Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil

WSS-M2C945-A

367

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

XO-5W20-QFS
Optional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12

WSS-M2C945-A

Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20

WSS-M6C65-A2

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL

WSP-M2C197-A

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L

WSP-M2C197-A

Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant

WSP-M2C197-A

368

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

MXY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-A

Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L

WSL-M2C192-A

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant

WSH-M17B19-A

369

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

YN-19
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant

370

MKZ (), enUSA

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

E142732

371

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.

Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors

AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors

Distance and strength

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.

372

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.

Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.

•

MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode (system
default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 files
may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio
present.

•

MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) and all folders containing MP3
files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to
F253 T255.
Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables you
to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of
tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system
only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder.

373

MKZ (), enUSA

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: The MyLincoln Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See
Entertainment (page 402).

Audio System

E146318

CD slot: Insert a CD.

Eject: Eject a CD.

TUNE +/-: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of the TUNE buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds
in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, select the previous or next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use
the TUNE buttons find to the previous or next channel in the selected category.

Volume:: Tap either side of the slider, or slide your finger across the control to increase or decrease the volume level on the system.
To slowly increase or decrease the volume level, press and hold either end of the slider.

374

MKZ (), enUSA

Audio System
E

Power: Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button.

Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either reverse
or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio band in individual increments.

MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located in the center
console or in front of the gear shift.

E194341

USB Port

SD card slot

375

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
GENERAL INFORMATION

376

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: You can also set up certain
convenience features using the MyLincoln
Mobile application on your smartphone. For
more information on MyLincoln Mobile, visit:
Web Address

support.lincoln.com/mylincolnmobile

MyLincoln Touch™

E161891

Phone.

Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation).

Climate.

Settings.

Home.

Information.

Entertainment.

377

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™

Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).

Press to select any of the following:
• My Home.
• Favorites.
• Previous Destinations.
• Point of Interest.
• Emergency.
• Street Address.
• Intersection.
• City Center.
• Map.
• Edit Route.
• Cancel Route.

PHONE

CLIMATE

Press to select any of the following:
• Phone.
• Quick Dial.
• Phonebook.
• History.
• Messaging.
• Settings.

Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings.
• Recirculated Air.
• Auto.
• Dual.
• Passenger Settings.
• A/C.
• Defrost.

This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cellular
phone, multimedia, climate control and
navigation system. The corners display any
active modes within those menus, such as
phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.

NAVIGATION

378

MKZ (), enUSA

SETTINGS
E142607

Press to select any of the following:
• Clock.
• Display.
• Sound.
• Vehicle.
• Settings.
• Help.
HOME
Press to access your home screen.
Depending on your vehicle’s
option package and software, your screens
may vary in appearance from the
descriptions in this section. Your features
may also be limited depending on your
market. Check with an authorized dealer for
availability.
E142613

INFORMATION
E142608

MyLincoln Touch™
Press to select any of the following:
• Services.
• Travel Link.
• Alerts.
• Calendar.
• Apps.
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
• AM.
• FM.
• SIRIUS.
• CD.
• USB.
• BT Stereo.
• SD Card.
• A/V In.

Using the Touch-Sensitive Controls on
Your System
To switch a feature on and off, just touch the
graphic with your finger. To get the best
performance from the touch-sensitive
controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They
are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center
of a touch-control graphic. Touching
off-center of the graphic may affect
operation of a nearby control.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based
on the touch of a finger, you may have
trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
• Keep metal and other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen as this may cause electronic
interference (for example, inadvertently
switching on a feature other than the one
you meant to switch on).

379

MKZ (), enUSA

Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your bezel:
• Power: Switch the media or climate
features off and on.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
media.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the entertainment
system.
• Climate control: Control the temperature,
fan speed or settings of the climate
control system.

Using Your Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use your steering wheel
controls to interact with the touchscreen
system.
•
•
•

VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session.
Press again and hold to end a voice
session.

MyLincoln Touch™
•

•

SEEK and PHONE ACCEPT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets or press
and hold to seek between stations.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between stations or press and
hold to fast seek.
• While in phone mode, press to
answer a call or to switch between
calls.
SEEK and PHONE REJECT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets or press
and hold to seek between stations.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between stations or press and
hold to fast seek.
• While in phone mode, press to end a
call or to reject and incoming call.

Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for
cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints are
still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol
to the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol
onto the display. Do not use detergent or
any type of solvent to clean the display.

Support
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.

In the United States, call: 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.

See Steering Wheel (page 78).

380

MKZ (), enUSA

Safety Information

•
•

Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables out
of the way, so they do not interfere with
the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.

MyLincoln Touch™
•

•

Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).

Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, such
as Point of Interest reviews and ratings,
SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores, movie
times or ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).

See the following chart for more specific
examples.

Restricted features

Cellular Phone

Pairing a Bluetooth phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent phone call entries

System Functionality

Editing the keypad code

381

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Restricted features

Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active
Wi-Fi and Wireless

Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks

Videos, Photos and
Graphics

Playing video

Text Messages

Composing text messages

Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper

Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Navigation

Using the keyboard to enter a destination
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas

382

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of

supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The system uses a log profile and
other data to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
development log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.

383

MKZ (), enUSA

System data access cannot occur without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not access
the system data for any purpose other than
as described absent consent, a court order,
or where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions
and Information.

MyLincoln Touch™
Accessing and Adjusting Modes through Your Vehicle Information Display

E156609

384

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
The display is located on the center of your
instrument cluster. It allows you to view and
make minor adjustments to active modes
without taking your hands off the wheel. For
example:
• In entertainment mode, you can view
what is now playing, change the audio
source, select presets and make some
adjustments.
• In navigation mode (if equipped), you can
view the current route or activate a route.
• In phone mode, you can accept or reject
an incoming call.

The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode.
• Press the left or right arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, Compass appears in the display
instead of Navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the Compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if
the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of
the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).

E145982

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.

This system helps you control many features
using voice commands. This allows you to
keep your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status bar
indicating the status of the voice session
(such as Listening, Success, Failed, Paused
or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands with Your
System

E142599

385

MKZ (), enUSA

Using Voice Recognition

Press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command clearly.

MyLincoln Touch™
What Can I Say?
You can say these commands at any time
during a voice session

•

"Previous page"

To access the available voice commands for
the current session, do one of the following:
• During a voice session, press the help
icon (?) in the lower left status bar of the
screen.
• Say, "What can I say?" for an on-screen
listing of the possible voice commands
associated with your current voice
session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say,
"Help" for an audible list of possible voice
commands.

"What can I say?"

Helpful Hints

Available voice commands

•

"Audio list of commands"

"Cancel"
"Exit"
"Go back"
"List of commands"
"Main menu"
"Next page"

"Help"

•

Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.

386

MKZ (), enUSA

Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
At any time, you can interrupt the system
while it is speaking by pressing the voice
icon.

•

Accessing a List of Available Commands
•

•

If you use the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon > Help > Voice Command
List.
If you use the steering wheel control,
press the voice icon. After the tone,
speak your command clearly.

"Bluetooth audio list of commands"
"Browse list of commands"
"CD list of commands"
"Climate control list of commands"
"List of commands"

MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Settings

Available voice commands

"Navigation list of commands"

Voice settings allow you to customize the
level of system interaction, help and
feedback. The system defaults to standard
interaction that uses candidate lists and
confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.

"Phone list of commands"
"Radio list of commands"
"SD card list of commands"

•

"Sirius satellite list of commands"
"Travel link list of commands"

•

"USB list of commands"
"Voice instructions list of commands"
"Voice settings list of commands"
"Help"
*

This command is only available when your
vehicle is equipped with the navigation
system, and the navigation system SD card
is in the card slot.
**

This command is only available when you
have an active SIRIUS satellite radio
subscription.

•

Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides
detailed interaction and guidance while
the advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: The system uses
these short questions to confirm your
voice request. If switched off, the system
simply makes a best guess as to what
you requested. The system may still
occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible results
from your voice commands. The system
creates these lists when it has the same
confidence level of several options based
on your voice command.

To access these settings using the
touchscreen:

387

MKZ (), enUSA

1. Press the Settings icon > Settings > then
Voice Control.
2.
•
•
•
•
•

Select from the following:
Interaction Mode.
Confirmation Prompts.
Media Candidate Lists.
Phone Candidate Lists.
Voice Control Volume.

To access these settings using voice
commands:
1. Press the voice icon. Wait for the prompt
"Please say a command". Another tone
sounds to let you know the system is
listening.
2. Say any of the following commands:
Voice settings using voice commands

"Confirmation prompts off"
"Confirmation prompts on"
"Interaction mode advanced"
"Interaction mode novice"

MyLincoln Touch™
Voice settings using voice commands

"Media candidate lists off"
"Media candidate lists on"
"Phone candidate lists off"
"Phone candidate lists on"
"Help"
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature
which allows you to switch between using
voice commands and making on-screen
selections. This is available only when the
system displays a list of candidates
generated during a voice session. For
example, when entering in a street address
or trying to call a contact from the phone you
paired to the system.

Privacy Notice for GPS Mapping with
MyLincoln Mobile in the United States
and Canada
If your vehicle is equipped with available
embedded modem (Reserve Package only),
MyLincoln Mobile allows for GPS mapping
when a vehicle is registered to a MyLincoln
Mobile account. To remove the vehicle from
the account, thereby removing GPS mapping
ability, a Master Reset can be performed in
the vehicle. See Settings (page 389).
Prior to transferring ownership of a vehicle,
owners may choose to execute a Master
Reset. It is recommended that new owners
conduct a Master Reset upon taking
possession of the vehicle to remove it from
any existing MyLincoln Mobile accounts.

388

MKZ (), enUSA

The new owner can download the MyLincoln
Mobile app, and follow the registration and
authorization process. For more information,
visit:
Web Address

support.lincoln.com/mylincolnmobile.

MyLincoln Touch™
SETTINGS

A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968

Clock

Display

Sound

Vehicle

Settings

Help

389

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Under this menu, you can set your
clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle settings
as well as access settings for specific modes
or the help feature.
E142607

Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date.
Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected,
your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal
to update the clock. Once your vehicle
acquires the signal, it may take a few
minutes for the update to display the correct
time.

You can also turn the outside air temperature
display off and on. It appears at the top
center of the touchscreen, next to the time
and date.
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.

Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display
through the touchscreen or by pressing the
voice button on your steering wheel controls
and when prompted, say, "Display settings".
E142607

•
E142607

1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other
adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour
mode, activate GPS time synchronization and
have the system automatically update new
time zones.

•

Press the Settings icon > Display,
to access and make adjustments
using the touchscreen.

Brightness allows you to make the
screen display brighter or dimmer.
Auto DIM, when set to On, lets you use
the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
When set to Off, screen brightness does
not change.

•

Mode allows you to set the screen to a
certain brightness or have the system
automatically change based on the
outside light level, or turn the display off.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you
have the options of turning the
display's Auto Dim feature on or off
and changing the Auto Dim Manual
Offset feature.
Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to
adjust screen dimming as the outside
lighting conditions change from day to
night. This feature also allows you to
adjust screen brightness using the
instrument panel dimming control.
Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen
display the default photo or upload
your own.

Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen
Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.

390

MKZ (), enUSA

•

MyLincoln Touch™
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank (black)
image on the display.

•
•

Sound

Bass

Your system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

Midrange

When you turn this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and make
adjustments:

Treble

To access, press the Settings icon
> Display > Edit Wallpaper, and
E142607
then follow the system prompts to
upload your photographs.

Camera Settings.
Enable Valet Mode.

Set Balance and Fade
*

DSP

E142607

Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions, display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384

Sound
E142607

Press the Settings icon > Sound,
then select from the following:

THX Deep Note Demo
*

Occupancy Mode

Speed Compensated Volume
*

Your vehicle may not have these sound
settings.

Vehicle
E142607

•
•

To turn the feature on or off, press the power
button.
Vehicle Health Report

Press the Settings icon > Vehicle,
then select from the following:

Ambient Lighting.
Vehicle Health Report.

391

MKZ (), enUSA

1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease
the intensity.

Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and
set the mileage interval at which you would
like to receive the reports. Press ? for more
information on these selections.

MyLincoln Touch™
When done making your selections, press
Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want
your report.

You can find more information on the rear
view camera in another chapter. See Rear
View Camera (page 199).

You can find more information on Vehicle
Health Report in this chapter. See
Information (page 431).

Enable Valet Mode

Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access settings for
your rear view camera.
E142607

•
•

Press the Settings icon > Vehicle
> Camera Settings, then select
from the following settings:

Enhanced Park Aids.
Rear Camera Delay.

Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN. You can
create your own four-digit PIN to lock and
unlock the system.

After you press Continue, the system locks
until you enter the PIN again.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the system
unlocks.

Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System

E142607

1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Enable Valet Mode.
2. Enter a four-digit pin twice, as prompted.

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> System, then select from the
following:

System

Language

Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.

Distance

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.

Temperature

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

System Prompt Volume

Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.

Touch Screen Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen.

392

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
System

Touch Panel Button Beep

Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices made through the climate or audio system.

Keyboard Layout

Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format.

Install Applications

Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses.

Master Reset

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data.

Voice Control

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Voice Control, then select from
the following:
Voice control

Interaction Mode
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists

Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
*

Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly heard or understood your request.

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.

393

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Voice control

Phone Candidate Lists

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.

Voice Control Volume

This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.

Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings

Media Player

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Media Player, then select from
the following:
Media player

Autoplay

When this feature is on, the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection. This
allows you to listen to music during the indexing process. When this feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source.

Bluetooth Devices

Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You can also set a device as your favorite so that the
system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle.

Index Bluetooth Audio
Devices

When this feature is on, the system automatically indexes media on your connected Bluetooth device.

394

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Media player

Gracenote Database Info

This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.

Gracenote Management

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.

Cover Art Priority

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files. This overrides any art
from your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.

Navigation

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Navigation, then select from the
following:
Navigation

Map Preferences

Switch breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top.
Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.

395

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation

Route Preferences

Choose to have the system display the Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route first. If you set Always Use
Preferred Route to Yes, the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired
destination. Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming. The system
only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting. Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low,
medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.

Navigation Preferences

Have the system use guidance prompts.
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province information.

Traffic Preferences

Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.

396

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation

Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.
Switch traffic alert notifications on and off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Avoid Areas

Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes.

Phone

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Phone, then select from the
following:

397

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™

Phone

Bluetooth Devices

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite.

Bluetooth

Turn Bluetooth on and off.

Do Not Disturb

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text
message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.

911 Assist

Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page 431).

Phone Ringer

Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Text Message Notification

Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Internet Data Connection

If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings
or have the system always connect, never connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more
information.

Manage Phonebook

Access features, such as automatic phonebook download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from
your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Roaming Warning

Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.

398

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that creates
a wireless network within your vehicle,
thereby allowing other devices (such as
personal computers or phones) in your
vehicle to speak to each other, share files or

play games. Using this Wi-Fi feature,
everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if you have a USB mobile
broadband connection inside your vehicle,
your phone supports personal area
networking and if you park outside a wireless
hotspot.

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Wireless & Internet, then select
from the following:

Wi-fi

Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for
connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You can categorize by
alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can also choose to search for a network, connect to a
network, disconnect from a network, receive more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This
forms the local area network within your vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and internet
browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet
gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.

399

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Wi-fi

USB Mobile Broadband

Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet.
(You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB
mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can select the following: Country,
Carrier, Phone Number, User Name and Password.

Bluetooth Settings

Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect,
disconnect, set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.

Prioritize Connection
Methods

Choose your connection methods and change them as needed. You can select to Change Order and have
the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
The Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED
Logo is a

Help

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Help,
then select from the following:

E142626

certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

400

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™

Help

Where Am I?

View your vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped
with navigation, you do not see this button.

System Information

Touchscreen system serial number
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote Database Information and Library version

Software Licenses

View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system.

Driving Restrictions

Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.

911 Assist

Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page 431).
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access
if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select
appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process.

Voice Command List

View categorized lists of voice commands.

401

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
To access Help using the voice commands,
press the voice button, then, after the tone,

say "Help". The system provides allowable
voice commands for the current mode.

ENTERTAINMENT

A
B

C
D
E

E161892

AM 1 and AM AST

FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST

SIRIUS

402

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
D

USB

Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereo and A/V In

These buttons change with the media mode you are in.

Radio memory presets and CD controls.

Note: Some features may not be available
in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.

Browsing Device Content

"BROWSE" within devices
"BROWSE" within devices

"Browse USB"

"Browse"

"Browse games"

"Help"
*

If you only say, "Browse", you can then say
any commands in the following chart.
**

When listening to audio on a device, you can
browse through other devices without having
to change sources. For example, if you are
currently listening to audio on an SD card,
you can browse all the artists that are stored
on your USB device.

E142599

"Browse channels"
"Browse SD card"
**

"Browse Sirius channel guide"

This command is only usable if you have an
active subscription to Sirius satellite radio.
"BROWSE"

" Games"

Press the voice icon on the
steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:

" channels"
**

"SD card"

403

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
"BROWSE"
*

"Sirius Channel Guide"
**

"USB"

"Help"
*

This command is only usable if you have an
active subscription to Sirius satellite radio.

Note: This is only available when your
MyLincoln Touch system language is set to
North American English.

Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice command.
For example, if you are listening to music on
a USB device, then want to switch to a
satellite radio channel, simply press the voice
button on the steering wheel controls and
say the name of the Sirius station (such as,
"the Highway"). The following voice
commands are available at the top level of
the voice session no matter which current
audio source you are listening to (such as a
USB device or Sirius satellite radio).

"Sirius <0-223>"*

"<87.9-107.9>"

"Sports games"*

"<530-1710>"
*

""*
"AM <530-1710>"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"Play [album] "**
"Play [artist] "**

This command is only usable if you have an
active subscription to Sirius satellite radio.
**

The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional. For
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this is
the same as the voice command, "Play [artist]
".

AM/FM Radio

"Play [genre] "**
"Play [playlist] "**
"Play [song] "**
"Play "

404

MKZ (), enUSA

"Play by "

Sample commands

For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.

Sample commands

E142611

Touch the AM or FM tab to listen
to the radio.

To change between AM and FM presets, just
touch the AM or FM tab.

MyLincoln Touch™
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive
radio broadcasts digitally, where available,
providing free, crystal-clear sound. See HD
Radio information later in this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong
AM or FM radio station. The light on the
button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
•
•

Bass
Midrange

•
•
•
•
•
•

Treble
Balance and Fade
THX Deep Note Demo
DSP (Digital Signal processing)
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then
choose to either seek or scan for the stations
playing that category.
RDS Text Display
This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
AST
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six strongest
stations in your current location.

405

MKZ (), enUSA

TAG Button
This feature is available when HD Radio is
on, and allows you to tag a song to download
later. When you select On, TAG appears
on-screen when HD Radio is active. You can
touch TAG to save the information of the
song that is playing. When you plug in your
portable music player, the information
transfers, if supported by your device. When
you are connected to iTunes®, the tags
appear to remind you of the songs you would
like to download. See HD Radio information
later in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the desired station
number manually. Touch Enter when you are
done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.

MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:

TAG allows you to save a song to download
later when you are on an acquired HD Radio
station and the feature is on. To turn the
feature on and use it:

E142616

The HD Radio logo either blinks when
acquiring a digital station, and then stays
solid when digital audio is playing, or is grey
when acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you may
also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.

406

MKZ (), enUSA

1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG Button
> On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch
TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the
song's information and transfers it to your
portable music player (if supported) when
you connect it to the system. The system
automatically transfers the tag to your
player (if already connected) and a
pop-up confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your
portable music player, the tags appear
to you as a reminder. The system allows
you to tag up to approximately 100
songs. For a list of devices that support
tagging, see www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

MyLincoln Touch™
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling
of all available stations. This feature still
works when HD Radio reception is on,
although it does not scan for HD2-HD7
channels. You may see the HD logo
appear if the station has a digital
broadcast.

•

Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute
due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is
available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station
mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog
to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

407

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio

technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues

Issues

Cause

Action

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio volume.

This is poor time alignment by the radio
broadcaster.

No action required. This is a broadcast issue.

Sound fading or blending in and out.

The radio is shifting between analog and
digital audio.

No action required. The reception issue may
clear up as you continue to drive.

There is an audio mute delay when selecting The digital multicast is not available until the No action required. This is normal behavior.
HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. HD Radio broadcast is decoded. Once
Wait until the audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel The previously stored multicast preset or
when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. direct tune is not available in your current
reception area.

No action required. The station is not available
in your current location.

Text information does not match currently
playing audio.

Fill out the station issue form at website listed

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

below.

408

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Potential station issues
Issues

Cause

Action

There is no text information shown for
currently selected frequency.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Fill out the station issue form at website listed

HD2-HD7 stations not found when Scan is
pressed.

Pressing Scan disables HD2-HD7 channel
search.

below.

No action required. This is normal behavior.

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company
and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed, added
or deleted at any time at the station owner's
discretion.

Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button on the
E142599
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "Radio",
then any of the following commands.

"RADIO"

"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD"

"<530-1710>"
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"

409

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
"RADIO"
2

"Browse"

"RADIO"

"TUNE"

"Set PTY"

"AM autoset preset <#>"

"Tune"

"FM <87.9-107.9>"

"Help"
1

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"

"FM"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"

If available.

If you have said "Browse", see the "Browse"
chart later in this section.
3

If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"

"FM 1"

"TUNE"

"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"

"FM 1"

"<530-1710>"

"FM 1 preset <#>"

"<87.9-107.9>"

"FM 2 preset <#>"
1

"HD <#>"

"Preset <#>"
"Radio off"

"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"

"Radio on"

410

MKZ (), enUSA

"AM preset <#>"

"FM"

"FM 2"
*

"FM 2 preset <#>"
*

"HD <#>"

MyLincoln Touch™
"TUNE"

"Preset <#>"
"Help"
*

If available.

Replay

Sound Settings

Replay audio on the current channel. You
can replay approximately 45 minutes of
audio as long as you have remained tuned
to the current station. Changing stations
erases the previous audio.

Touch this button to adjust settings for:

Save a channel by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the channel.
Sound returns when finished.

While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to
hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause the
audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if you
have been using the feature to replay
audio.

ALERT

Scan

Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite. The system alerts you when it plays
again on any channel.

Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of
channels.

Sirius® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
E142611

Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
SIRIUS tab.

Memory Presets

Options
Touch this button to view and adjust various
media settings.
411

MKZ (), enUSA

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Bass
Midrange
Treble
Balance and Fade
THX Deep Note Demo
DSP (Digital Signal processing)
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then
choose to either seek or scan for the stations
playing that category.
Parental Lockout
This allows you to lock and unlock channels,
change or reset your PIN or unlock all
channels. To use this feature, you need your
initial PIN, which is 1234.

MyLincoln Touch™
Artist/Title/Team Alerts

Browse

This feature allows you to select Artists, Titles
and Teams that you would like the system
to alert you to when they are playing on
other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete
or turn off alerts. You can also set all alerts
to on or off. When an alert appears on the
screen, you can choose to Tune to the
channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable
Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event,
you can save your favorite teams so that the
system can alert you when they are playing
on a satellite radio channel.

Touch this button to view a list of all available
stations. Scroll to see more categories.
Touch the station you want to listen to.

Note: Sirius does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor
Company shall not be responsible for Alert
feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
Sirius requires this number when
communicating with you about your account.

Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to
listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists
on other stations.
Sirius Satellite Radio Information
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

Direct Tune

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of Sirius
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius
at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

Touch this button to enter the desired
satellite channel number manually. Touch
Enter when you are done.

412

MKZ (), enUSA

E142593

Sirius satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed Sirius satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term that begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.

MyLincoln Touch™
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN

is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your ESN,
touch the bottom left corner of the
touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS > Options.

Sirius Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.
ence

413

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™

Troubleshooting tips
Radio display

Cause

Action

Acquiring...

Radio requires more than two seconds to
produce audio for the selected channel.

Sat Fault/Sirius System Failure.

There is an internal module or system failure If this message does not clear shortly, or with
present.
an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.

Invalid Channel.

The channel is no longer available.

Tune to another channel or choose another
preset.

Unsubscribed Channel.

Your subscription does not include this
channel.

Contact Sirius at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.

No Signal.

The signal is lost from the Sirius satellite or
Sirius tower to your vehicle antenna.

The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.

Updating.

Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up
to three minutes.

414

MKZ (), enUSA

No action required. This message should
disappear shortly.

MyLincoln Touch™
Troubleshooting tips
Radio display

Cause

Action

Call Sirius
1-888-539-7474.

Your satellite service is no longer available.

None found. Check Channel Guide.

All the channels in the selected category are Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or
either skipped or locked.
Skip function on that station.

Subscription Updated.

Sirius has updated the channels available for No action required.
your vehicle.

Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands

"SIRIUS"
"SIRIUS"

If you are listening to Sirius satellite
radio, press the voice button on
E142599
the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.

If you are not listening to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after the tone,
say "Sirius", then any of the following
commands.

"SAT preset <#>"

"Preset <#>"
"SAT"

"SAT 1"

"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Sirius off"
"Sirius on"
*

"SAT 1 Preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"

415

MKZ (), enUSA

Contact Sirius at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.

"Sports game"

MyLincoln Touch™
"SIRIUS"
"TUNE"

You can also advance and reverse the
current track or current folder, if applicable.

"Tune"

"Help"

"Preset <#>"

If you have said "Sports game", see the
following "Sports game" chart.

"SAT"
"SAT 1"

If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.

"SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"

"SPORTS GAME"

"SAT 2 preset <#>"

"Tune to the game"

"SAT 3"

"Tune to the game"

"SAT 3 preset <#>"

"Tune to the
game"

"Sirius <0-223>"
"Help"

"Tune to the game"
"Help"

CD
E142611

Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn
the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire
albums in random order, or turn the feature
off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of
all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
Options

Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
CD tab.

416

MKZ (), enUSA

Repeat

Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:

MyLincoln Touch™
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Bass
Midrange
Treble
Balance and Fade
THX Deep Note Demo
DSP (Digital Signal processing)
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Compression
Touch this button to turn the compression
feature off and on.
Browse
Touch this button to look through all
available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
E142599
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.

If you are not listening to a CD, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",
then any of the following commands.

"Shuffle off"
"Help"

"CD"

This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.

"Pause"

SD Card Slot and USB Port

"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
*

"Repeat folder"
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
*

"Shuffle CD"

"Shuffle folder"

417

MKZ (), enUSA

"CD"

SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, press the card in and
the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull
the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 446).

MyLincoln Touch™
USB Port

In order to playback video from your iPod or
iPhone, you must have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable (which you
can buy from Apple). When you connect the
cable to your iPod or iPhone, plug the other
end into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.

E142619

The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access door
in the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your device, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
SD

E142621

The USB ports are located either in the
center console or behind a small access door
in the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your device, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.

Repeat
This feature replays the currently playing
song or album.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play music on the
selected album or folder in random order.

E142620

logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

418

MKZ (), enUSA

Insert your device and select the
SD Card or USB tab once the
system recognizes it. You can then
select from the following options:
E142611

MyLincoln Touch™
Similar Music
This feature allows you to choose music
similar to what is currently playing.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.

More Info

Media Player Settings allows you to select
more settings, which is under Media Player.
See Settings (page 389).

Touch this button to see disc information
such as current track, artist name, album and
genre.

Device Information displays software and
firmware information about the currently
connected media device.

Options

Update Media Index indexes your device
when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (such as
adding or removing tracks) to make sure you
have the latest voice commands available
for all media on the device.

Touch this button to view and adjust various
media settings.
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings
for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.

Browse
This feature allows you to view the contents
of the device. It also allows you to search by
categories, such as genre, artist or album.
If you want to view song information such as
Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and Genre,
touch the on-screen album art.

419

MKZ (), enUSA

You can also touch What’s Playing to hear
how the system pronounces the current band
and song. This can be helpful when using
voice commands to make sure the system
correctly plays your request.
Playing Video from Your Device
To access and play video from your device,
your vehicle's transmission must be in
position P with the ignition in accessory
mode. See Starting and Stopping the
Engine (page 156).
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
If you are listening to a USB device
or an SD card, press the voice
E142599
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an
SD card, press the voice button and, after
the tone, say "USB" or "SD card", then any
of the following commands.

MyLincoln Touch™
"USB" or "SD CARD"

"USB" or "SD CARD"

"Play playlist "

"Repeat one"

"Browse"

"Play podcast "

"Shuffle"

"Next"

"Play podcast episode "

"Shuffle album"

"Pause"

"Play similar music"

"Shuffle off"

"Play"

"Play song "

"What's this?"

"USB" or "SD CARD"
*

"Play album "

"Help"

"Play TV show "

"Play all"

If you have said you would like to browse
your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to browse.
When prompted, see the following "Browse"
chart.

"Play artist "

"Play TV show episode "

"Play audiobook "

"Play video "

"Play author "

"Play video podcast "

"Play composer "

"Play folder "

"Play video podcast episode "

"Play genre "

"Play video playlist "

"Previous"

"Play movie "

"Play music video "

"Repeat all"
"Repeat off"

420

MKZ (), enUSA

These commands are only available in USB
mode and are device-dependent.
"BROWSE"

"Album "
"All albums"
"All artists"

MyLincoln Touch™
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information

"BROWSE"

"All audiobooks"

"Artist "

"All authors"

"Audiobook "

"All composers"

"Author "

"All folders"

"Composer "

"All genres"

"Folder "

"Genre "

"All movies"

It is also able to organize your indexed media
from your playing device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.

"Playlist "

"All music videos"

"Podcast "

"All playlists"

If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata
tags as Unknown.

"TV show "

"All podcasts"

"All songs"

"Video "
*

"All TV shows"

"All video playlists"

"Video playlist "
*

"Video podcast "
"Help"

"All video podcasts"
*

"All videos"

This command is only available in USB
mode and is device-dependent.

421

MKZ (), enUSA

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital
media player, including iPod, Zune™, plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV and AAC.

MyLincoln Touch™
Bluetooth Audio

A/V Inputs

Your system allows you to stream audio over
your vehicle's speakers from your connected,
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.

WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.

E142611

To access, press the lower left
corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.

Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
If you are listening to a Bluetooth
audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
control. When prompted, say "Next song",
"Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".
E142599

If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio
device, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play" or
"Previous song".

For safety reasons, do not connect or
adjust the settings on your portable
music player while your vehicle is moving.

422

MKZ (), enUSA

WARNINGS
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your vehicle
is moving. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which
may increase the risk of serious injury. The
audio extension cable must be long enough
to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while your vehicle is moving.

MyLincoln Touch™
To use the auxiliary input jack feature, make
sure that your portable music player is
designed for use with headphones and that
it is fully charged. You also need an audio
extension cable with stereo male 1/8-inch
(3.5 millimeter) connectors at one end and a
RCA jack at the other.

E142622

Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (such as a
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included) to
these input jacks. The jacks are yellow, red
and white and are located either behind a
small access door on the instrument panel
or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack to play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's
speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5 millimeter)
RCA adapter into the two left A/V input jacks
(red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select A/V In.

1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable
music player. Set the parking brake and
put the transmission in position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the adapter
in one of the two left A/V input jacks
(white or red) inside the center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
station or a CD (if there is a CD already
loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab. (You
should hear audio from your portable
music player although it may be low.)
423

MKZ (), enUSA

7. Adjust the sound on your portable music
player until it reaches the level of the FM
station or CD by switching back and forth
between the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod or
iPhone, you must have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable (which you
can buy from Apple). When you connect the
cable to your iPod or iPhone, plug the other
end into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Troubleshooting
•

•

Do not connect the audio input jack to a
line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume control.
Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary to
match the volume of the CD or FM radio
as this causes distortion and reduces
sound quality.

MyLincoln Touch™
•

If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the batteries
in the portable media player.

•

Control the portable media player in the
same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (such as Play or
Pause) over the attached portable media
player.

PHONE

A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968

424

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
A

Phone

Quick Dial

Phonebook

History

Messaging

Settings

Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of SYNC. Once you pair your phone, you can
access many options using the touchscreen
or voice commands. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cellular phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.

•
•

Call waiting notification.
Caller ID.

Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your device’s manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

425

MKZ (), enUSA

Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving

MyLincoln Touch™
The first thing you must do to use the phone
features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your phone in a
hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in park (P). Switch
on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC
appears on the screen, and instructs you
to begin the pairing process from your
device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cellular phone is in the proper
mode. See your device’s manual if
necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
device, it does not support Secure Simple
Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed
on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.

4. When prompted on your phone’s display,
confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC
matches the PIN displayed on your
cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your device's manual
and visit the website.

Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in park (P). Switch
on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the
touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices >
Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cellular phone is in the proper
mode. See your device’s manual if
necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.

426

MKZ (), enUSA

3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
device, it does not support Secure Simple
Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed
on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display,
confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC
matches the PIN displayed on your
cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your device's manual
and visit the website.

Making Calls
Press the voice button on your
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, "Call " or
say "Dial", then the desired number.
E142599

E142632

controls.

To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold this phone
button on your steering wheel

MyLincoln Touch™
Receiving Calls

Phone

During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.

Touch this button to access the on-screen
numerical pad to enter a number and place
a call. During an active call, you can also
choose to:
• Mute the call.
• Put the call on hold.
• Turn on the privacy feature.
• Join two calls.
• End the call.

Accept the call by pressing Accept
on the touchscreen or by pressing
this phone button on your steering
wheel controls.
Reject the call by pressing Reject
on the touchscreen or by pressing
and holding this phone button on
your steering wheel controls.
E142632

Quick Dial

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.

Set up favorite contacts from your
phonebook or history folder.

Phone Menu Options

Phonebook

Press the top left corner on your touchscreen
to select from the following options:

Touch this button to access and call any
contacts in your previously downloaded
phone book. The system places the entries
in alphabetical categories summarized at the
top of the screen.

History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. If
your phone does not support downloading
call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps
track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Messaging

427

MKZ (), enUSA

To switch on contact picture settings, if your
device supports this feature, press Phone >
Settings > Manage Phonebook > Download
photos from Phonebook > On.

Send text messages using your touchscreen.
See Text messaging later in this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone
settings, such as turning Bluetooth on and
off, managing your phonebook and more.
See Phone settings later in this section.

MyLincoln Touch™
Text Messaging

Composing a Text Message

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.

Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It
is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3
mph (5 km/h).

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.

Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, such as
LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen (speaker icon).
• Dial.
• Send Text.
• View.
• Delete.

1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from
your phonebook.
4. You can select from the following
options:
• Send, which sends the message as it is.
• Edit Text, which allows you to customize
the pre-defined message or create a
message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the message
list.

I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL

428

MKZ (), enUSA

Text message options

MyLincoln Touch™
Receiving a Text Message

Bluetooth

Text Message Notification

Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.

Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.

Select a text message notification, if
supported by your phone. Choose from
possible system alert tones, text-to-speech
or silent.

When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
supported by your phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the message to
you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.

Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices

Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go
directly to your voice mail and not ring in the
vehicle. When this feature is on, text
message notifications do not ring inside the
cabin either.
911 Assist
Switch on or switch off the 911 Assist feature.
See Information (page 431).
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when
you receive a call. Choose from possible
system ring tones, your currently paired
phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or
a silent notification.

Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add
or delete a device, as well as save it as a
favorite.

429

MKZ (), enUSA

Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen
to adjust your internet data connection.
Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to switch off
your connection. You can also choose to
adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for
more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such as
automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts
from your phone as well as delete or upload
your phonebook.

MyLincoln Touch™
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert
you when your phone is in roaming mode.

Phone Voice Commands

"PHONE"

"Do not disturb on"

"Reply to text messages"

"Forward text messages"

"Turn ringer off"
"Turn ringer on"

Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
E142599
prompted, say any of the following
commands:

"Go to hands free"

"Call"
"Call "

"Join calls"

"Listen to text message <#>"

"Messages"

"Call on other"

"Pair phone"

"Do not disturb off"

"MESSAGES"

"Call"

"Mute call"

"Dial"

If you say "Messages", see the following
"Messages" chart for additional commands.

"Listen to text messages"

"Call on cell"

"Call voicemail"

"Forward text messages"

"Privacy on"

"Read text message"

"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Reply to text messages"
"Help"

430

MKZ (), enUSA

This command is only available during an
active call.

"Call at home"
"Call at work"

"Help"

"Hold on"
"PHONE"

"Unmute call"

"Hold call off"

MyLincoln Touch™
INFORMATION

A
B
C
D
E

E161889

SYNC Services

Sirius Travel Link

Alerts

Calendar

SYNC Applications

431

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
Under the Information menu, you can access
features such as:
• SYNC Services
• Sirius Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Applications
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button to access these features. If
your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation,
press the corner of the touchscreen with the
green tab.
E142608

Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC
Services. See Phone (page 424).
Note: This feature does not function properly
if you have enabled caller ID blocking on
your cellular phone. Make sure your cellular
phone is not blocking caller ID before using
SYNC Services.

SYNC Services (If Equipped, United
States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and
model year and may require a subscription.
Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions
available in select markets. Message and
data rates may apply. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to change or discontinue
this product service at any time without prior
notification or incurring any future obligation.

432

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for
the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.

MyLincoln Touch™
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service may
collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to give
you personalized traffic reports, precise
turn-by-turn directions, business search,
news, sports, weather and more. For a
complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice
Commands

E142599

1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow
the voice prompts to request the desired
service, such as "Traffic" or "Directions".
You can also say, "What are my choices?"
to receive a list of available services from
which to choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the
Touchscreen

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button.

433

MKZ (), enUSA

If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate an
outgoing call to SYNC Services using
your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired Service,
such as "Traffic" or "Directions". You can
also say, "What are my choices?" to
receive a list of available services from
which to choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say
"Directions" or "Business search". To find
the closest business or type of business
to your current location, just say
"Business search" and then "Search near
me". If you need further assistance in
finding a location you can say "Operator"
at any time within a Directions or
Business search to speak with a live
operator. The system may prompt you to

MyLincoln Touch™
speak with an operator when it has
difficulty matching your voice request.
The live operator can assist you by
searching for businesses by name or by
category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street
intersections. Operator Assist is a feature
of your SYNC Services subscription. For
more information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download is
finished, the phone call automatically
ends.

If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
information display, in the status bar of
your touchscreen system and on the
SYNC Services screen. You also receive
driving instructions from audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can select
Route Summary or Route Status using
the touchscreen controls or voice
commands to view the Route Summary
Turn List or the Route Status ETA. You
can also turn voice guidance on or off,
cancel the route or update the route.

434

MKZ (), enUSA

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say, "Yes"
when prompted and the system delivers a
new route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the route
and provides driving instructions. See
Navigation (page 446).
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone button
on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC Services
main menu.

MyLincoln Touch™

SYNC Services quick tips

Personalizing

You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points, such as work or home. You can also save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more about personalization by logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Push to interrupt

Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio
clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.

Portable

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.

SYNC Services Voice Commands
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
E142599
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:

"SERVICES"
"SERVICES"

"Cancel route"
"Navigation voice off"
"Navigation voice on"
"Next turn"
"Route status"
"Route summary"

435

MKZ (), enUSA

"Services"
"Update route"
"Help"

MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.

Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link, it
can help you locate the best gas prices, find
movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view
the current weather map, get accurate ski
conditions and see scores to current sports
games.
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
E142608

Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your vehicle’s
current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.

436

MKZ (), enUSA

Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at
stations close to your vehicle’s location or
on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie
theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby
weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to
see the weather map, which can show
storms, radar information, charts and winds.
Select Area to select from a listing of weather
locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and
schedules from a variety of sports. You can
also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes
when a game is in progress.

MyLincoln Touch™
Ski Conditions

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

Touch this button to view ski conditions for
a specific area.
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
E142599
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"5-day weather forecast"
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings"
*

"Sports headlines"

"Sports schedules"
*

"Sports scores"
"Traffic"
"Weather"

"Weather map"

"Help"

If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports
schedules" or "Sports scores", you can then
say any of the commands in the following
chart.
Sports-related Commands

"WNBA"

"Help"

If you want to hear headlines, schedules or
scores from a particular sport, or your favorite
team(s), say the sport (or team), then
"headlines", "schedules" or "scores".
Additional sports-related voice commands

"Baseball"

"Baseball headlines"

"College basketball"

"Baseball schedule"

"College football"

"Baseball scores"

"Golf"

"College basketball headlines"

"MLS"

"College basketball schedule"

"My teams"

"College basketball scores"

"NBA"

"College football headlines"

"NFL"

"College football schedule"

"NHL"

"College football scores"

437

MKZ (), enUSA

Sports-related Commands

MyLincoln Touch™
Additional sports-related voice commands

Additional sports-related voice commands

"Golf headlines"

"NFL schedule"

"Golf leaderboard"

"NFL scores"

"Golf schedule"

"NHL headlines"

"MLS headlines"

"NHL schedule"

"MLS schedule"

"NHL scores"

"MLS scores"

"WNBA headlines"

"Motor sports headlines"

"WNBA schedule"

"Motor sports order"

"WNBA scores"

"Motor sports schedule"

"Help"

"My team headlines"
"My teams schedule"
"My teams scores"
"NBA headlines"
"NBA schedule"
"NBA scores"

This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.

Calendar
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
E142608

Alerts
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
E142608

"NFL headlines"

438

MKZ (), enUSA

Press Alerts, and then choose from any of
the following services:
• View the complete message
• Delete the message
• Delete All messages

Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.

MyLincoln Touch™
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not dial
for help, which could delay response time,
potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately to
avoid delayed response time, which could
increase the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist
within five seconds of the crash, the system
or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in a crash.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury to
someone or damage the phone, which could
prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.

Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

439

MKZ (), enUSA

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 43). Important information regarding
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 248).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
E142608
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
E142607

•
•

Pressing the Settings icon > Settings >
Phone > 911 Assist, or
Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911
Assist.

MyLincoln Touch™
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone
to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the United States, Canada
or in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would trigger
911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services if 911 Assist triggers. If
a connected phone sustains damage or loses
connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and
tries to connect to, any available previously
paired phone and tries to make the call to
911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."

440

MKZ (), enUSA

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown from
the vehicle.

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose
to emergency services that your vehicle has
been in a crash involving the deployment of
an airbag or activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically

MyLincoln Touch™
or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your
vehicle location or other details about your
vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not turn the feature on.

Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is
no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.

Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)

Note: This feature may not function properly
if you have enabled caller ID blocking on
your cellular phone. Before running a report,
review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy
Notice.

WARNING
Always follow scheduled maintenance
instructions, regularly inspect your
vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report
supplements, but cannot replace, normal
maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle
Health Report only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle and
will not monitor or report the status of any
other system, (such as brake lining wear).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result
in vehicle damage and serious injury.

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.

Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your account
at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your
report. You can also choose for SYNC to
remind you automatically to run reports at
specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, such
as:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report

Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
E142608

441

MKZ (), enUSA

If you want to run a report by using
the touchscreen, touch Apps >
Vehicle Health Report.

MyLincoln Touch™
To run a report by voice command,
press the voice button on the
E142599
steering wheel and, when
prompted, say "Vehicle health report".
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also

collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up
your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.

442

MKZ (), enUSA

CLIMATE
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius in the
settings menu. See Settings (page 389).
Press the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line and
option package, your climate screen may
look different from the screen shown here.

MyLincoln Touch™

E171848

Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. When the system is off, outside air cannot enter your vehicle.

Passenger settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may have the following features: Touch DUAL to switch
on or off the ability to control the passenger side temperature separately. When switched off, the passenger side temperature
always agrees with the driver’s temperature setting. Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the heated seat icon to
control the heated seat (if equipped). Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat (if equipped). See Seats (page 137).

Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. All fan indicators turn off whenever
the fan speed is automatically controlled.

443

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
D

Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button
illuminates and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or
be prevented from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

MAX A/C: Touch to switch on. The system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents, the air conditioning
automatically turns on, the driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO and the fan speed adjusts to the highest speed. This
re-cooling of the interior is more economical and efficient than normal A/C.

A/C: Touch to switch air conditioning on or off. To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows
slightly open for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. In certain
conditions, the air conditioning compressor may still operate even though the A/C button is off.

AUTO: Touch to switch on fully automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system
automatically adjusts fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain
the selected temperature.

Rear defrost: Touch to switch the rear window defroster and heated mirrors (if equipped) on or off.

MAX defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. With the driver and passenger temperatures set to HI, outside air
distributes through the windshield vents, the air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest
speed. The heated rear window automatically turns on when you switch on MAX defrost and you will be unable to select recirculated
air (to prevent fogging).

444

MKZ (), enUSA

MyLincoln Touch™
J

Manual airflow distribution controls: Press these buttons to switch airflow on or off to the windshield, instrument panel or floor
vents. The system can distribute air thru any combination of these vents. The indicators for all of these buttons turn off whenever
the air distribution is automatically controlled

Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may have the following features: Touch the + and - to adjust
the temperature. Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat (if equipped). Touch the cooled seat icon to control the
cooled seat (if equipped). See Seats (page 137). Touch MyTemp to select your previously pre-set temperature setpoint. Touch and
hold MyTemp to store a new pre-set for temperature setpoint. Touch the heated steering wheel icon (if equipped) to warm the
steering wheel.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.

Climate Control Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
E142599
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Climate control commands

"Climate automatic"

Climate control commands

"A/C off"

"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"

"A/C on"

"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"

"Automatic"

"Help"

"Defrost off"

There are additional climate control
commands but in order to access them, you
have to say "Climate" first. When the system
is ready to listen, you may say any of the
following commands:

"Defrost on"
"Dual off"
"Floor on"
"Fan decrease"

"Climate my temperature"

"Fan increase"

"Climate off"

"MAX A/C off"

445

MKZ (), enUSA

"CLIMATE"

"Climate on"

MyLincoln Touch™
"CLIMATE"

"CLIMATE"

"MAX A/C on"

"Temperature increase"

"My temp"

"Temperature low"

"Off"

"Help"
*

"On"
"Panel floor on"

If you say "Temperature", you can then say
any of the commands in the following chart.

"Panel on"

"TEMPERATURE"

"Rear defrost off"

"<15.5-29.5> degrees"

"Rear defrost on"

"<60-85> degrees"

"Recirc off"

"High"

"Recirc on"
"Temperature"

"Low"
*

"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Temperature decrease"
"Temperature high"

"Help"

NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.

446

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. See Setting a destination
later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right-hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
Map mode later in this chapter.

Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:

MyLincoln Touch™

Destination

My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route Cancel Route

1. Enter the necessary information into the
highlighted text fields (in any order). For
address destination entry, the Go! button
appears once you enter all the necessary
information. Pressing the Go! button
makes the address location appear on
the map. If you choose Previous
Destination, the last 20 destinations you
have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set
this as a waypoint (have the system route
to this point on the way to your current
destination) or save it as a favorite. The
system considers any Avoid Areas
selections in its route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types
of routes, and then select Start Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.

447

MKZ (), enUSA

You can cancel the route or have the system
demo the route for you. Select Route Prefs
to set route preferences like avoiding
freeways, tollroads, ferries and car trains as
well as to use or not use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes. (High-occupancy vehicle lanes
are also known as carpool or diamond lanes.
People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route button,
the system defaults to the Fastest Route
option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the
talking bubble icon that appears in the upper
right navigation corner (green bar) if you want
the system to repeat route guidance
information. When the system repeats the
last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction,
since it detects when the vehicle is moving.

MyLincoln Touch™
Point of Interest (POI) Categories

cityseekr
Subcategories

Main categories

Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping

Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education

Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services

To expand these listings, press the + in front
of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).

448

MKZ (), enUSA

Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in Canada
and 11 in Mexico).

E142634

cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address and phone number. If cityseekr lists
the point of interest, more information is
available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.

MyLincoln Touch™
Press More Information for a longer review,
a list of services and facilities, the average
room or meal price as well as the website.
This screen displays the point of interest icon
such as:
Hotel
E143884

Coffeehouse
E142636

Food & Drink
E142637

Nightlife
E142638

Attraction
E142639

This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
E142640

When you are viewing more information for
hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the hotel
has certain services and facilities using icons,
such as:
• Restaurant.
• Business center.
• Handicap facilities.
• Laundry.
• Refrigerator.
• 24 hour room service.
• Fitness center.
• Internet access.
• Pool.
• Wi-fi.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.

449

MKZ (), enUSA

For hotels, cityseekr can provide information
such as star rating, price category, review,
check-in and checkout times, hotel service
icons and website address.

Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
E142607

Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Navigation.

Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled
route with white dots. Switch this feature ON
or OFF.
Turn List Format
Have the system display your turn list Top
to Bottom or Bottom to Top.

MyLincoln Touch™
Parking POI Notification

Eco Time Penalty

Traffic Preferences

Set the automatic parking point of interest
notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
When parking point of interest notification is
on, the icons display on the map when you
get close to your destination. This may not
be very useful in dense areas, and may
clutter the map when other points of interest
display.

Select a low, medium or high cost for the
calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting,
the longer the time allotment is for the route.

Avoid Traffic Problems

Route Preferences
Preferred Route
Choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
first. If you set Always Use Preferred Route
to Yes, the system uses the selected route
type to calculate only one route to the
desired destination.
Always Use Preferred Route
Bypass route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route setting.

Navigation Preferences

Choose how you want the system to handle
traffic problems along your route.
• Automatic: Have the system reroute you
to avoid traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route. The system
does not provide a traffic alert
notification.
• Manual: Have the system always provide
a traffic alert notification for traffic
incidents along the planned route. You
have a choice to accept or ignore the
notification before making the route
deviation.

Guidance Prompts

Traffic Alert Notification

Have the system use Voice & Tones or Tone
Only on your programmed route.

Have the system display traffic alert
notifications.

Avoid
These features allow you to choose to have
the system avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries
and car trains when planning your route.
Switch these features ON or OFF.
Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle
lanes, if available, when planning your route.

Auto - Fill State/Province
Have the system automatically fill in the state
and province based on the information
already entered into the system. Switch this
feature ON or OFF.

450

MKZ (), enUSA

Other traffic alert features allows you to turn
on certain, or all, traffic icons on the map
such as road work, incident, accidents and
closed roads. Scroll down to view all the
different types of alerts. Switch these
features ON or OFF.

MyLincoln Touch™
Avoid Areas
Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you.
Press Add to program an entry. Once you
make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete
a selection, choose the listing on the screen.
When the screen changes to Avoid Areas
Edit, you can press Delete at the bottom
right of the screen.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks
appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage
varies and improves with updated map
releases.

Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks
(when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land elements
and detailed railway infrastructure for the
most essential cities around the globe. These
maps also contain features, such as town
blocks, building footprints and railways.

E142643

E174016

Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes:
Heading up, North up and 3D.

North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be upward
on the screen.

3D map mode provides an elevated
perspective of the map. This viewing
E142644
angle can be adjusted and the map
can be rotated 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
View switches between full map, street list
and exit view in route guidance.
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows
direct access to navigation settings,
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route.

451

MKZ (), enUSA

Heading up (2D map) always shows
the direction of forward travel to be
E142642
upward on the screen. This view is
available for map scales up to 2.5 miles (4
kilometers). The system remembers this
setting for larger map scales, but shows the
map in North up only. If the scale returns
below this level, the system restores Heading
up.

MyLincoln Touch™
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance. When
E174017
the light on the button illuminates,
the feature is on. The speaker button
appears on the map only when route
guidance is active.

E146188

Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current

location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then synchronizes
with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle
is traveling, the farther in the map zooms in;
the faster your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms out. To switch off the feature,
just press the + or - button again.

In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping
your finger across the shaded bar with the
arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and displays
the distance and time to your destination. If
the button is pressed, a pop up appears with
the destination listed (and waypoint if
applicable) along with mileage and time to
destination. You may also select to have
either the estimated time to reach your
destination or your estimated arrival time.
Map Icons

E142646

Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays in
the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.

Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the
map; the fixed icon is in the center
E142647
of the screen. The map position
closest to the cursor is in a window on the
top center part of the screen.

Home indicates the location on the
map currently stored as the home
position. You can only save one
E142649
address from the Address Book as
your Home entry. You cannot change this
icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons indicate
locations of any point of interest
E142650
categories you choose to display on
the map. You can choose to display three
point of interest categories on the map at
one time.
Starting point indicates the starting
point of a planned route.
E142651

452

MKZ (), enUSA

Address book entry default icon(s)
indicates the location on the map of
E142648
an address book entry. This is the
default symbol shown after the entry has
been stored to the Address Book by any
method other than the map. You can select
from any of the 22 icons available. You can
use each icon more than once.

MyLincoln Touch™
Waypoint indicates the location of a
waypoint on the map. The number
inside the circle is different for each
E142652
waypoint and represents the position
of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142653

E142654

Next maneuver point indicates the
location of the next turn on the
planned route.

No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals are
available for accurate map
E142655
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor
GPS access.

Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the
map display to access the following options:

Set as Dest

View/Edit Route

Touch this button to select a scrolled location
on the map as your destination. You may
scroll the map by pressing your index finger
on the map display. When you reach the
desired location, simply let go and then touch
Set as Dest.

Access these features when a route is active:
• View Route
• Edit Destination/Waypoints
• Edit Turn List
• Detour
• Edit Route Preferences
• Edit Traffic Preferences
• Cancel Route.

Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current location
as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current location
to your favorites.
POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display
on the map. You can select up to three icons
to display on the map at the same time. Turn
these ON or OFF.
Cancel Route
Touch this button to cancel the active route.

453

MKZ (), enUSA

Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to Nokia
by going to http://mapreporter.navteq.com.
Nokia evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.

MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ (1-866-462-8837) (in
Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going to
www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.

Navigation Voice Commands

Navigation system voice commands

"Destination favorites"

"Show 3D"

"Destination home"

"Show heading up"

"Destination intersection"

"Show map"

"Destination nearest "

"Show north up"

"Destination nearest POI"

Navigation system voice commands
1

"Cancel route"
2

"Destination"

"Destination "

"Destination POI category"
"Destination previous destination"
"Destination street address"

"Voice guidance off"
"Voice guidance on"
"Where am I?"
"Zoom in"

"Detour"

"Navigation"

"Navigation voice volume decrease"
"Navigation voice volume increase"
"Repeat instruction"

454

"Show turn list"

"Destination POI"

"Destination "

MKZ (), enUSA

"Show route"

"Destination play nametags"

When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
E142599
wheel controls. After the tone, say
any of the following commands:

"Cancel next waypoint"

Navigation system voice commands

MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation system voice commands

"DESTINATION"

"NAVIGATION"

"Zoom out"

"Nearest POI"

"Zoom to "

"Help"

"Play nametags"

These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.
2

If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the following "Destination"
chart.

"POI category"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"

If you say "Navigation", you can then say
any command in the following "Navigation"
chart.

"NAVIGATION"
*

"Destination"
"DESTINATION"

""
""
"Favorites"
"Home"
"Intersection"
"Nearest "

"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"Zoom minimum"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"

455

MKZ (), enUSA

"Help"
*

If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either "Navigation destination
street address" or "Destination street
address", the system asks you to say the full
address. The system displays an example
on-screen. You can then speak the address
naturally, such as "One two three four Main
Street, Anytown".

Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
an authorized dealer or visit our online store
at www.Accessories.Lincoln.com (United
States only).
Lincoln Custom Accessories are available
for your vehicle through an authorized
Lincoln dealer. Lincoln Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly authorized
dealer-installed Lincoln Genuine Accessory
found to be defective in factory-supplied
materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln Genuine Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.

Exterior style
•
•
•

Side-window deflectors.
Wheels.
Bumper protectors.

Interior style
•
•
•

All-weather floor mats.
Rear seat entertainment*.
Premium carpeted floor mats.

Lifestyle
•
•
•
•

Ash cup (smoker's packages).
Cargo area protector.
Cargo net.
Cargo organizer.

Peace of mind
•
•

Car cover*.
Wheel locks.

456

MKZ (), enUSA

*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.

Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Consult an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.

•

Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.

457

MKZ (), enUSA

Appendices
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
•

You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY") from an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation ("MS") . Those
installed software products of MS origin,
as well as associated media, printed

•

materials, and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") are
protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The MS
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("FORD
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.

458

MKZ (), enUSA

•

The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of third
party origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE
and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
hereinafter collectively and individually
will be referred to as "SOFTWARE".

Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).

Description of Other Rights and Limitations
•

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
•

You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICE and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.

•

Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse
engineer, decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.

459

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICE, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media

Appendices

•

and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail
to comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use the
WMDRM technology included in your
DEVICE to protect their intellectual
property, included copyrighted content.
Portions of the SOFTWARE on your
DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does not
affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected
content, you agree that Microsoft may

•

include a revocation list with the licenses.
Content owners may require you to
upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an
upgrade, you will not be able to access
content that requires the upgrade.
Consent to Use of Data: You agree that
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and systems suppliers, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent may collect
and use technical information gathered
in any manner as part of product support
services related to the SOFTWARE or
related services. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent may use this
information solely to improve their
products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form
that personally identifies you.
460

MKZ (), enUSA

•

Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service suppliers, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components").

Appendices
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make available
Supplemental Components, and no other
EULA terms are provided, then the terms of
this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity
providing the Supplemental Component(s)
shall be the licensor of the Supplemental
Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of the
SOFTWARE.

461

MKZ (), enUSA

Appendices
•

Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent. Neither
MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their
affiliates nor their designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent.

•

Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions particularly
as they pertain to safety and assumes
any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE
as a replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying

462

MKZ (), enUSA

printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE
is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the
SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property
rights in and to the content which may be
accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is
the property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property laws
and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights
to use such content. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and service
providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use
of any on-line services which may be
accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use
relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE
contains documentation that is provided only
in electronic form, you may print one copy
of such electronic documentation.

Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for
the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its
parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or
their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product
support, please refer to FORD MOTOR
COMPANY instructions provided in the

documentation for the DEVICE. Should you
have any questions concerning this EULA,
or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please refer
to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT
CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES
SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT
IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00).
•

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.

463

MKZ (), enUSA

Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®]
technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe®
Flash® Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under
license from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia
Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe,
Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.

Appendices
Read and follow instructions: Before using
your Windows Automotive- based system,
read and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user manual
("User's Guide"). Not following precautions
found in this User's Guide can lead to an
accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept in
the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a ready
reference for you and other users unfamiliar
with the Windows Automotive-based system.
Please make certain that before using the
system for the first time, all persons have
access to the User's Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.

WARNING
Operating certain parts of this system
while driving can distract your attention
away from the road, and possibly cause an
accident or other serious consequences. Do
not change system settings or enter data
non-verbally (using your hands) while driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to
distract your attention away from the road
and remove your hands from the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions within
the Windows Automotive-based system may
be accomplished using only voice
commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system
without removing your hands from the wheel.

464

MKZ (), enUSA

Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access
any function requiring a prolonged view of
the screen while you are driving. Pull over in
a safe and legal manner before attempting
to access a function of the system requiring
prolonged attention. Even occasional short
scans to the screen may be hazardous if your
attention has been diverted away from your
driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently a
statistical process which is subject to errors.
It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system
and address any errors.

Appendices
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are intended
to provide turn by turn instructions to get you
to a desired destination. Please make certain
all persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety information
fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features
may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your
attention and could cause an accident or
other serious consequences. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation
features are provided only as an aid. Make
your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment. Any
route suggestions made by this system
should never replace any local traffic
regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.

Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by
this system may be inaccurate because of
changes in roads, traffic controls or driving
conditions. Always use good judgment and
common sense when following the
suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be
contained in the map database for such
navigation features.

465

MKZ (), enUSA

Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you and
Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect to the
Telenav Software (including upgrades,
modifications, or additions thereto)
(collectively “Telenav Software”). All
references herein to “you” and “your” means
you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your

Appendices
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information provided
by you to Telenav (directly or through the
use of the Telenav Software, is subject to
Telenav’s privacy policy located at
http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and the
privacy policy at any time, with or without
notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time to
review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the Telenav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the Telenav
Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and
otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own
personal judgment while driving. If you feel
that a route suggested by the Telenav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe
situation, or directs you into an area that you

consider to be unsafe, do not follow such
instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or
otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software,
unless your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the Telenav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.

466

MKZ (), enUSA

2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the Telenav
Software, to provide Telenav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform Telenav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants to
you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as expressly
permitted below in connection with your
permanent transfer of the Telenav Software
license), without the right to sublicense, to
use the Telenav Software (in object code
form only) in order to access and use the
Telenav Software. This license shall
terminate upon any termination or expiration
of this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the Telenav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, and
not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.

Appendices
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a)
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble,
translate, modify, alter or otherwise change
the Telenav Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code, audio
library or structure of the Telenav Software
without the prior express written consent of
Telenav; (c) remove from the Telenav
Software, or alter, any of Telenav’s or its
suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos,
patent or copyright notices, or other notices
or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e) use
the Telenav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening,

abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory,
vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the Telenav Software without
advanced written permission of Telenav.

survival of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.

4. Disclaimers

TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.

To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to
applicable law, in no event will Telenav, its
licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be liable
for any decision made or action taken by you
or anyone else in reliance on the information
provided by the Telenav Software. Telenav
also does not warrant the accuracy of the
map or other data used for the Telenav
Software. Such data may not always reflect
reality due to, among other things, road
closures, construction, weather, new roads
and other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising out of
your use of the Telenav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree
not to rely on the Telenav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being or

467

MKZ (), enUSA

Appendices
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO
YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY
TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS
DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT
YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED
HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL
DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE),
THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL

BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY
PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be
settled by independent arbitration involving
a neutral arbitrator and administered by the
American Arbitration Association in the
County of Santa Clara, California. The
arbitrator shall apply the Commercial
Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note
that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator
shall be binding upon both parties. You
expressly agree to waive your right to a jury
trial.

468

MKZ (), enUSA

This Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its conflict
of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the
binding arbitration, both Telenav and you
agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction
of the courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations Convention
on Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the Telenav
Software, and expressly conditioned upon
the new user of the Telenav Software
agreeing to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale,
assignment or transfer that is not expressly
permitted under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case you

Appendices
and all other parties shall immediately cease
all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at
any time without notice, provided the
assignee remains bound by this Agreement.

intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and Telenav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.

8. Miscellaneous

8.3

8.1

By using the Telenav Software, you consent
to receive from Telenav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the Telenav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically.
Telenav may provide such Notices by posting
them on Telenav’s Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the Telenav
Software.

This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without limitation
all related intellectual property rights. No
licenses or other rights which are not
expressly granted in this Agreement are

469

MKZ (), enUSA

8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party’s right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.

Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words “without
limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and other
data licensed to Telenav by third party
vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user
terms applicable to these companies
(included at the end of this Agreement), and
thus your use of the Telenav Software is also
subject to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s
third party vendor licensors:

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.

470

MKZ (), enUSA

©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.

Appendices
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with the
Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication

with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs.

content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.

Warning.

Disclaimer of Warranty:

The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.

TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.

No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you
agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and
its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,

471

MKZ (), enUSA

Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF
ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR

Appendices
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR
BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF
TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain liability
exclusions or damages limitations, so to that
extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control.

and regulations administered by the Office
of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.
Department of Commerce and the Bureau
of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.

You shall not export from anywhere any part
of the Data or any direct product thereof
except in compliance with, and with all
licenses and approvals required under,
applicable export laws, rules and regulations,
including but not limited to the laws, rules

472

MKZ (), enUSA

Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European HERE
Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its
conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert
“The Netherlands” where European HERE
Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims
and actions arising from or in connection with
the Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in

Appendices
accordance with these End-User Terms, and
each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded
as appropriate with the following “Notice of
Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with
such Notice:

If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these EndUser Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.

I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”

473

MKZ (), enUSA

B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose.

Appendices
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-

sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”

under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:

3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such EndUsers, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided

The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or

474

MKZ (), enUSA

Appendices
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of

the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.

II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Territory

475

MKZ (), enUSA

Notice

Appendices
Ecuador

Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana
and
Martinique
Mexico

“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-201101- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”

“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”

IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:

Country

Notice

Jordan

“© Royal Jordanian Geographic
Centre”. The foregoing notice
requirement for Jordan Data is
a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its
permitted sublicensees (if any)
fail to meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license with
respect to the Jordan Data.

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”

476

MKZ (), enUSA

shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.

Appendices
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from

Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.

477

MKZ (), enUSA

C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Country(ies) Notice
Austria

Appendices
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
France

Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden
mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Great
Britain

“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010”

Greece

“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”

Hungary

Italy

“La Banca Dati Italiana è stata
prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto prodotta
e fornita dalla Regione
Toscana.”

Norway

Portugal

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”

Spain

“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”

Sweden

Switzerland

E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
update such list from time to time. The
478

MKZ (), enUSA

license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).

Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDSTMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not

remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.

devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.

Restrictions

NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.

Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer

479

MKZ (), enUSA

Limited Warranty

rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty

Appendices
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER

480

MKZ (), enUSA

NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.

Appendices
Entire Agreement

Gracenote® Copyright

These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents #5,987,525, #6,061,680, #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6.240,459, #6,330,593 and other patents
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.

Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").

481

MKZ (), enUSA

The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections
set forth herein that are available to
Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from
Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third

Appendices
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances
will either Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material
or music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.

Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE

482

MKZ (), enUSA

ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
Vehicle with SYNC only

Appendices
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this equipment or device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with Touchscreen/My
Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.

483

MKZ (), enUSA

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Lincoln Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP,
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.

1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1000 covered
components, this plan is so complete that
we generally only discuss what’s not
covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in
the U.S. and Canada. It is the only extended
service plan authorized and backed by
Lincoln Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.

1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•
•
•
•

484

MKZ (), enUSA

Rental Car Reimbursement

Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage to
the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle was
properly maintained with Lincoln ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Brake pads and linings.
Shock absorbers.
Belts and hoses.
Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.

Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Lincoln ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039

Windshield wiper blades.
Spark plugs (except in California).
The clutch disc.

485

MKZ (), enUSA

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Lincoln
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•
•
•

•

Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada
and the United States, provided by a network
of participating authorized Lincoln Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.

486

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?

Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 355).

Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.

487

MKZ (), enUSA

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.

Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.

Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Information
Messages (page 113).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.

488

MKZ (), enUSA

Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.

Scheduled Maintenance
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.

It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.

Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.

Check every month

Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.

Check every six months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.

489

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months

Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection

Accessory drive belt(s)

Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance

Horn operation

Engine air filter

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses

Exhaust system

Suspension components for leaks or damage

490

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection

Exterior lamps operation

Steering and linkage

Fluid levels ; fill if necessary

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure

For oil and fluid leaks

Windshield for cracks, chips or pits

Half-shaft dust boots

Washer spray and wiper operation

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.

Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.

NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.

491

MKZ (), enUSA

This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.

Scheduled Maintenance

When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Interval

Vehicle use and example

Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)

Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe

5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)

3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)

Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation

492

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display

Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (All-wheel drive vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (All-wheel
drive vehicles).

493

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*

Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.

Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 285).

Other maintenance items

Every 20000 miles (32000 Replace cabin air filter.
km)
Every 30000 miles (48000 Replace engine air filter.
km)
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)

Change engine coolant.

Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).

494

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items

Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt(s).

Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
3
4

Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).

SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.

495

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
message comes on at 28751 miles
(46270 kilometers). Perform the
30000-mile (48000 kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.

•

Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 miles
(48000 kilometers) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at
25000 miles [40000 kilometers]).
Perform the engine air filter replacement.

Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Inspect and lubricate U-joints.

Every 30000 miles (48000 See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.

496

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace cabin air filter.
Replace engine air filter.

Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid.
km)
Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs.
km)

Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace cabin air filter.
Replace engine air filter.

Every 5000 miles (8000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
*
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
Change engine oil and filter.
or six months

497

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)

Perform multi-point inspection.
Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid.
km)
*

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 285).

Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)

Every oil change

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.

Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.

California Fuel Filter Replacement

Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals

If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.

Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3000 miles
(5000 kilometers).

498

MKZ (), enUSA

If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is 1800
miles (3000 kilometers).

Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and

dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

499

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

500

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

501

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

502

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

503

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

504

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

505

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

506

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

507

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

508

MKZ (), enUSA

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

509

MKZ (), enUSA

510

MKZ (), enUSA

Index

A
A/C

Adjusting the Headlamps...........................297
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................298
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................297

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD...........................................................373
Autolamps.........................................................85

See: Climate Control..........................................132

Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................78

Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........86

About This Manual............................................7

Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column................................................................78

Automatic Climate Control..........................132
Automatic High Beam Control....................88

Protecting the Environment..................................7

ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................183

ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................183

Accessories...................................................456
Exterior style........................................................456
Interior style.........................................................456
Lifestyle.................................................................456
Peace of mind.....................................................456

Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12

ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............204

Active Park Assist..........................................195

AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps..................................89

Airbag Disposal...............................................52
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................132

Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................76

All-Wheel Drive...............................................177
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................76
Arming the Alarm..................................................77
Disarming the Alarm.............................................77

Appendices....................................................458
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............106
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................106
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................106
Keyless Warning Alert........................................106
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................106

Automatic Steering into Parking Space........196
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature.............197
Troubleshooting the System............................198
Using Active Park Assist....................................195

Audio Control...................................................79

Adaptive Headlamps.....................................89

Audio System................................................372

Seek, Next or Previous........................................79
General Information...........................................372

511

MKZ (), enUSA

Activating the System..........................................89
Manually Overriding the System......................89

Automatic Transmission................................171
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................175
Brake-Shift Interlock Override..........................174
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................176
Push Button Shift Transmission........................171
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission..............173

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................289
6F35/HF35 transmission..................................289
6F50/6F55 Transmission.................................290

Autowipers.......................................................83
Auxiliary Power Points.................................153
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................153
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................153
Locations...............................................................153

AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................177

Index

B
Blind Spot Information System..................217
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®) with
Cross Traffic Alert............................................217

Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............279

Booster Seats..................................................26
Types of Booster Seats.......................................26

Brake Fluid Check........................................293
Brakes..............................................................183
General Information............................................183

Breaking-In.....................................................245
Bulb Specification Chart.............................298

C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................135
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................360
Specifications.......................................................361

Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.......366

Changing a Bulb...........................................298
Lamp Assembly Condensation.......................298
Replacing Bulbs..................................................298

Changing a Fuse..........................................278
Fuses.....................................................................278

Changing a Road Wheel.............................345
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................346
Stowing the flat tire (Type 1)..............................351
Stowing the flat tire (Type 2).............................351
Tire Change Procedure.....................................347
Type 1.....................................................................347
Type 2....................................................................349

Changing the 12V Battery..........................294
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................301
2.0L EcoBoost Engine........................................301
3.7L Engine............................................................301

Changing the Wiper Blades......................296
Checking MyKey System Status.................62
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................296
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................40
Child Safety.......................................................15

Specifications......................................................367

General Information..............................................15

Capacities and Specifications...................355
Car Wash

Child Safety Locks..........................................30

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................303

Left-Hand Side........................................................31
Right-Hand Side.....................................................31

Center Console.............................................155

Child Seat Positioning...................................28
512

MKZ (), enUSA

Cleaning Leather Seats..............................309
Cleaning Products........................................303
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................309
Cleaning the Engine....................................305
Cleaning the Exterior..................................303
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................304
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................304
Stripes or Graphics............................................304
Underbody...........................................................304

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................308
Cleaning the Interior...................................305
Cleaning Black Label Interior (If
Equipped)........................................................306

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................305
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................60
Climate............................................................442
Climate Control Voice Commands................445

Climate Control..............................................132
Climate Controlled Seats............................146
Cooled Seats........................................................146

Collision Warning System..........................223
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................223

Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................286

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator...........51

Index
Creating a MyKey...........................................60

Driver and Passenger Airbags....................44

Engine Block Heater....................................160

Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................60

Children and Airbags...........................................45
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................45

Engine Coolant Check................................286

Cruise Control.................................................80

See: Using Cruise Control...............................203

Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags.........49
Driving Aids.....................................................211
Driving Hints..................................................245
Driving Through Water...............................245
DRL

Customer Assistance..................................254

See: Daytime Running Lamps............................87

Principle of Operation.......................................203
Type 1.......................................................................80
Type 2......................................................................80

Cruise control

Data Recording..................................................9

Economical Driving......................................245
Electric Parking Brake..................................184

Daytime Running Lamps...............................87
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)...........................................87
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................88

Direction Indicators........................................90
Drive Control.................................................226

Adding Engine Oil..............................................285

Applying the electric parking brake...............184
Applying the electric parking brake when the
vehicle is moving............................................185
Battery With No Charge....................................186
Releasing the electric parking brake.............185

Emission Control System............................168

Driver Alert.......................................................211
Using Driver Alert.................................................211

End User License Agreement...................458
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)...............................................................458

513

MKZ (), enUSA

Engine Immobilizer
Engine Oil Check.........................................285

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................169
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing...............................................................170

LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL............................226

Adding Engine Coolant.....................................287
Checking the Engine Coolant.........................286
Recycled Engine Coolant.................................288
Severe Climates.................................................288
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................288
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................75

D
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9

Using the Engine Block Heater.......................160

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................285
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L...........................285
Engine Specifications..................................355
Drivebelt Routing................................................355

Entertainment................................................402
A/V Inputs.............................................................422
AM/FM Radio.......................................................404
Bluetooth Audio..................................................422
Browsing Device Content................................403
CD............................................................................416
SD Card Slot and USB Port...............................417
Sirius® Satellite Radio (If Activated).................411
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information....................................421

Index

Essential Towing Checks...........................240

Fastening the Safety Belts...........................33

Garage Door Opener

Before Towing a Trailer......................................241
Hitches..................................................................240
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).............................................241
Safety Chains......................................................240
Trailer Brakes......................................................240
Trailer Lamps.......................................................240
When Towing a Trailer........................................241

Rear Inflatable Safety Belt..................................35
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.......................36
Safety Belt Locking Modes.................................34
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy.............33

EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................184

Flat Tire Inflation
See: Temporary Mobility Kit..............................313

See: Data Recording..............................................9

Floor Mats......................................................246
Front Passenger Sensing System..............45
Fuel and Refueling.........................................161
Fuel Consumption.........................................167

Export Unique Options...................................14
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................484

Calculating Fuel Economy................................168
Filling the Tank.....................................................167

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY).................485
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).............................484

Fuel Filter........................................................294
Fuel Quality.....................................................162

Event Data Recording

Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Auto-Dimming Feature........................................95
Blind Spot Monitor................................................96
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................95
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................95
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors............................96
Memory Mirrors.....................................................95
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................94
Power-Folding Mirrors.........................................95
Signal Indicator Mirrors.......................................95

Choosing the Right Fuel....................................162
Octane Recommendations...............................162

Fuel Shutoff...................................................249
Fuses................................................................261
Fuse Specification Chart.............................261
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel...........272
Power Distribution Box......................................261

514

MKZ (), enUSA

See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............148

Gauges............................................................100
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............102
Fuel Gauge............................................................101
Information Display..............................................101

General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................53
Intelligent Access..................................................53

General Maintenance Information...........487
Multi-Point Inspection.......................................490
Owner Checks and Services...........................489
Protecting Your Investment..............................487
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.............................487
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................487

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................257
Getting the Services You Need................254
Away From Home..............................................254

Global Opening and Closing.......................94
Closing the Windows...........................................94
Opening the Windows.........................................94

Index

H
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................249
Headlamp Exit Delay......................................87
Head Restraints..............................................137
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................138
Tilting Head Restraints ......................................139

Heated Seats..................................................144
Front Seats............................................................144
Rear Heated Seats..............................................145

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................183
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............279

I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................255
Information Display Control.........................80
Cluster Display Control Features.....................80

Heated Steering Wheel..................................81
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................135

Information Displays.....................................107

Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................135
Heated Rear Window.........................................135

Information......................................................431

Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................132

Hill Start Assist...............................................186
Switching the System On and Off...................187
Using Hill Start Assist..........................................187

Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................134

General Information............................................107
911 Assist...............................................................439
Alerts......................................................................438
Calendar...............................................................438
Sirius Travel Link.................................................436
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only)..................................................................432
Vehicle Health Report........................................441

Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................134
General Hints........................................................134
Heating the Interior Quickly..............................134
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............134
Recommended Settings for Heating..............134
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................134

515

MKZ (), enUSA

Index
Information Messages...................................113

Transmission....................................................129

Active Park.............................................................113
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................114
AdvanceTrac™........................................................115
Airbag......................................................................115
Alarm.......................................................................115
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................116
AWD.........................................................................116
Battery and Charging System...........................117
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System................................................................118
Doors and Locks...................................................118
Driver Alert.............................................................119
Fuel..........................................................................119
Hill Start Assist.....................................................120
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................120
Lane Keeping System.........................................121
Maintenance.........................................................122
MyKey.....................................................................123
Park Aid..................................................................124
Park Brake.............................................................124
Power Steering....................................................125
Pre-Collision Assist.............................................126
Remote Start.........................................................126
Seats.......................................................................127
Starting System ...................................................127
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................128
Traction Control...................................................128

Installing Child Seats.......................................17
Child Seats...............................................................17
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts............................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................23
Using Tether Straps..............................................24

Instrument Cluster........................................100
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................86
Interior Lamps..................................................90
Front Interior Lamp................................................91
Rear Interior Lamp.................................................91
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped).......................92

Keyless Entry....................................................70
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................70

Keyless Starting.............................................156
Ignition Modes.....................................................156

Keys and Remote Controls...........................53

L
Lane Keeping System..................................212
Switching the System On and Off...................212

Interior Luggage Compartment
Release...........................................................73
Interior Mirror...................................................96

Lighting Control..............................................85

Auto-Dimming Mirror............................................97

Lighting..............................................................85
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......12
Load Carrying................................................228
Load Limit.......................................................228

Introduction.........................................................7

J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................250
Connecting the Jumper Cables......................251
Jump Starting.......................................................251
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................250
Removing the Jumper Cables........................252

516

MKZ (), enUSA

Headlamp Flasher................................................85
High Beams............................................................85

Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................228

Index
Locking and Unlocking.................................65
Activating Intelligent Access ............................66
Autolock Feature...................................................67
Auto Relock............................................................67
Battery Saver.........................................................68
Illuminated Entry...................................................68
Illuminated Exit......................................................68
Luggage Compartment.......................................68
Power Decklid (If Equipped)..............................69
Power Door Locks................................................65
Remote Control.....................................................65
Smart Unlocks .......................................................67

Locks..................................................................65
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................345

M
Maintenance..................................................279
General Information...........................................279

Media Hub......................................................375
Memory Function..........................................142
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................143
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob.......143
Saving a PreSet Position...................................142

Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................107

Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................135
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................93

Mobile Communications Equipment...........13
Moonroof..........................................................98
Bounce-Back..........................................................99
Opening and Closing the Moonroof................98

Motorcraft Parts............................................356
MyKey Troubleshooting................................63
MyKey™..............................................................59
Principle of Operation.........................................59

MyLincoln Touch™.........................................376
General Information...........................................376

Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................286
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................285

Opening and Closing the Hood...............279
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................259
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............259

Overhead Console.......................................155

Parking Aid......................................................192

Navigation......................................................446

Parking Aids....................................................192
Passive Anti-Theft System............................75

Front Sensing System........................................194
Rear Sensing System.........................................193

cityseekr................................................................448
Map Mode.............................................................451
Navigation Map Updates..................................454
Navigation Voice Commands..........................454
Point of Interest (POI) Categories...................448
Quick-touch Buttons..........................................453
Setting a Destination.........................................446
Setting Your Navigation Preferences............449

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............491
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®..............................491
Maintenance Intervals.......................................493

517

MKZ (), enUSA

SecuriLock..............................................................75

PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................75

Perchlorate........................................................12
Personal Safety System™..............................42
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................42

Index
Phone..............................................................424
Making Calls........................................................426
Pairing Subsequent Phones............................426
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time...........425
Phone Menu Options.........................................427
Phone Settings....................................................429
Phone Voice Commands..................................430
Receiving Calls....................................................427
Text Messaging...................................................428

Post-Crash Alert System............................252
Spinout Detection..............................................253

Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................65

Power Seats....................................................139
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion
..............................................................................141
Power Lumbar.......................................................141

Power Steering Fluid Check......................293
Power Windows..............................................93
Accessory Delay...................................................94
Bounce-Back..........................................................93
One-Touch Down..................................................93
One-Touch Up.......................................................93
Window Lock..........................................................94

R
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................147
Armrest pass-through.........................................147

Rear Seats.......................................................143
Rear View Camera........................................199
Using the Rear View Camera System..........200

Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................199

Recommended Towing Weights..............238
Refueling.........................................................165
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.....................165

Remote Control...............................................54
Car Finder...............................................................56
Intelligent Access Key.........................................54
Remote Start..........................................................56
Replacing the Battery..........................................55
Sounding a Panic Alarm......................................56

Remote Start...................................................136
Automatic Settings..............................................136

Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................309
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................58
518

MKZ (), enUSA

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................260
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......259
Roadside Assistance...................................248
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................249
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................249
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................248
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................248

Roadside Emergencies...............................248
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................245

Running Out of Fuel.....................................163
Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container.......163

S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment....................37
Safety Belt Minder..........................................38
Belt-Minder™...........................................................38

Safety Belts......................................................32
Principle of Operation..........................................32

Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................37
Conditions of operation......................................38

Index
Safety Precautions.........................................161
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............499
Scheduled Maintenance.............................487
Seats.................................................................137
Security..............................................................75
Settings...........................................................389
Clock......................................................................390
Display..................................................................390
Settings.................................................................392
Sound.....................................................................391
Vehicle....................................................................391

Side Airbags.....................................................48
Side Curtain Airbags......................................49
Sitting in the Correct Position.....................137
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................340

Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
Special Instructions...............................................13

Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................495
Exceptions............................................................498

Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................203

Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................157
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................158
Failure to Start......................................................158
Fast Restart...........................................................157
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................159
Important Ventilating Information...................159
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................159
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................159

Starting and Stopping the Engine.............156
General Information............................................156

Steering..........................................................222
Electric Power Steering....................................222

Steering Wheel................................................78
Storage Compartments...............................155
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................98

Sun Shades......................................................97
Sun Visors.........................................................97
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.....................................97

Supplementary Restraints System.............43
Principle of Operation..........................................43

Symbols Glossary..............................................7

Stability Control.............................................190
Principle of Operation........................................190

T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............355

Temporary Mobility Kit.................................313
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air.........................................315
General Information............................................313
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure........316
Tips for Use of the Kit.........................................314
Type 1......................................................................313
Type 2.....................................................................319
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed................................................................317
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured............315

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).........................256
Tire Care.........................................................326
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................328
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................326
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................329
Temperature A B C.............................................327
Traction AA A B C...............................................327
Treadwear.............................................................327

Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Temporary Mobility Kit..............................313

519

MKZ (), enUSA

Index
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............341

Universal Garage Door Opener................148

Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.........................................342
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................342

HomeLink Wireless Control System...............148

AdvanceTrac® .......................................................191

Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................204

Using Traction Control.................................188

Blocked Sensor..................................................209
Changing the Set Speed..................................207
Detection Issues.................................................208
Disengaging the System..................................207
Following a Vehicle...........................................205
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................207
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation..............207
Overriding the System......................................207
Resuming the Set Speed..................................207
Setting a Speed..................................................205
Setting the Gap Distance.................................206
Switching the System Off.................................208
Switching the System On.................................204
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...............210
System Not Available........................................209

Switching the System Off Using a
Switch................................................................188
Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls.......................188
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........188

Tire Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit..............................313

Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................313

Towing a Trailer.............................................237
Load Placement..................................................237

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........243
Emergency Towing............................................243
Recreational Towing..........................................243

Towing.............................................................237
Traction Control.............................................188
Principle of Operation........................................188

Transmission Code Designation..............359
Transmission....................................................171
Transmission

Using All-Wheel Drive...................................177

See: Transmission.................................................171

Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive (AWD)......................................................177

Transporting the Vehicle............................242

Using Cruise Control...................................203

U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.....................................................281
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L.....................283

Switching Cruise Control Off...........................204
Switching Cruise Control On...........................203

Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................63
Using Snow Chains......................................340

520

MKZ (), enUSA

Using Stability Control..................................191

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................257

V
Vehicle Care..................................................303
General Information...........................................303

Vehicle Certification Label.........................358
Vehicle Identification Number..................358
Vehicle Storage.............................................310
Battery.....................................................................311
Body........................................................................310
Brakes......................................................................311
Cooling system.....................................................311
Engine.....................................................................311
Fuel system............................................................311
General..................................................................310
Miscellaneous........................................................311
Removing Vehicle From Storage......................311
Tires.........................................................................311

Index
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................132

VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............358

Voice Control...................................................80

Washer Fluid Check....................................293
Washers

Warning Lamps and Indicators..................102
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................102
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................103
Battery....................................................................103
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................103
Brake System.......................................................103
Cruise Control......................................................103
Direction Indicator...............................................103
Door Ajar...............................................................103
Electric Park Brake..............................................103
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................104
Engine Oil..............................................................104
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................104
Front Airbag..........................................................104
Heads Up Display...............................................104
High Beam............................................................104
Hood Ajar..............................................................104
Low Fuel Level.....................................................104
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................104
Low Washer Fluid................................................105
Parking Lamps.....................................................105
Powertrain Fault..................................................105
Service Engine Soon..........................................105
Stability Control...................................................105
Stability Control Off............................................106
Trunk Ajar..............................................................106

521

MKZ (), enUSA

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................303
See: Wipers and Washers..................................82

Waxing............................................................304
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................345

Wheels and Tires...........................................313
Technical Specifications...................................353

Windows and Mirrors.....................................93
Windshield Washers.......................................84
Windshield Wipers.........................................82
Intermittent Wipe..................................................82
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................82

Wipers and Washers......................................82

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Unknown
Create Date                     : 2014:10:06 22:09:19Z
Modify Date                     : 2014:10:09 16:19:32-04:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Untitled
Creator                         : Unknown
Producer                        : XEP 4.16 build 20090723
Trapped                         : False
Creator Tool                    : Unknown
Metadata Date                   : 2014:10:09 16:19:32-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:d8b29d16-01fe-40c3-a296-857be00ca05d
Instance ID                     : uuid:4ae8b158-0ce8-4975-bd26-f5f9aa63c8fc
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 524

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lincoln 2015 Mkz Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation